Gestetner C7425dn Software Manual

Add to My manuals
301 Pages

advertisement

Gestetner C7425dn Software Manual | Manualzz

Operating Instructions

Software Guide

Read This First

Manuals for This Printer........................................................................................ 8

Preparing for Printing

Quick Install............................................................................................................ 9

Confirming the Connection Method................................................................... 11

Network Connection................................................................................................. 11

Local Connection ..................................................................................................... 13

Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port.................................................. 15

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .................................................................. 15

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (TCP/IP)................................................. 16

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (NetBEUI) .............................................. 17

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (IPP) ...................................................... 19

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - TCP/IP).................. 21

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - NetBEUI) ............... 22

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - IPP) ....................... 24

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)......................... 26

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - NetBEUI) ...................... 27

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP) .............................. 28

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - TCP/

IP) .......................................................................................................................... 30

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - IPP)

31

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - TCP/IP) ...................... 33

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - NetBEUI) ................... 34

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)............................ 35

Changing the Port Settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ................................ 37

G1058614_1.00

GB GB EN USA G105-8614 Copyright © 2004

1

Using the Standard TCP/IP Port ......................................................................... 39

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................ 39

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) ....................................... 40

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) ..... 41

Using the LPR Port .............................................................................................. 44

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................ 44

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) ....................................... 45

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) ..... 46

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)..................................... 47

Using as the Windows Network Printer ............................................................. 49

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................ 49

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me) ................................ 50

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) ....................................... 51

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) ..... 52

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)..................................... 54

Using as the NetWare Print Server/Remote Printer.......................................... 56

When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver.............................................................. 57

Form Feed................................................................................................................ 58

Banner Page ............................................................................................................ 58

Printing after Resetting the Printer ........................................................................... 58

Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ............................................................. 59

Windows 98 SE/Me - USB ....................................................................................... 59

Windows 2000 - USB ............................................................................................... 61

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB ............................................................. 62

Troubleshooting USB ............................................................................................... 63

Printing with Parallel Connection....................................................................... 64

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................ 64

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me) ................................ 65

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) ....................................... 66

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) ..... 67

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)..................................... 68

Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)............................... 69

Windows 2000.......................................................................................................... 69

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003........................................................................ 71

Printing with Bluetooth™ Connection ............................................................... 73

Supported Profiles.................................................................................................... 73

Printing with Bluetooth™ Connection....................................................................... 73

If a Message Appears during Installation .......................................................... 76

Making Option Settings for the Printer .............................................................. 77

Conditions for Bidirectional Communication ............................................................ 77

If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled .............................................................. 78

Setting Up the Printer Driver

PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties............................................................. 80

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................ 80

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................... 81

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................. 83

2

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................ 84

RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties .......................................................... 87

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................ 87

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................... 88

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................. 90

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................ 92

PostScript 3 - Setting Up for Printing ................................................................ 95

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................ 95

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................... 96

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................. 98

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................ 99

Mac OS - Setting Up for Printing............................................................................ 101

Other Print Operations

Printing a PDF File Directly............................................................................... 103

Using DeskTopBinder Lite ..................................................................................... 103

Installing DeskTopBinder Lite ................................................................................ 103

Using Commands................................................................................................... 104

Sample Print ....................................................................................................... 105

Printing the First Set............................................................................................... 105

Printing the Remaining Sets................................................................................... 106

Deleting a Sample Print File................................................................................... 107

Checking the Error Log .......................................................................................... 107

Locked Print ....................................................................................................... 109

Sending Print Job to the Printer ............................................................................. 109

Entering a Password .............................................................................................. 110

Deleting a Locked Print File ................................................................................... 111

Checking the Error Log .......................................................................................... 112

Form Feed........................................................................................................... 113

Canceling a Print Job ........................................................................................ 114

Windows - Canceling a Print Job ........................................................................... 114

Mac OS - Canceling a Print Job............................................................................. 115

Caution During Printing .................................................................................... 117

Collate .................................................................................................................... 117

Spool Printing......................................................................................................... 117

Cover...................................................................................................................... 119

Memory Capacity and Paper Size.......................................................................... 119

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Menu Chart ......................................................................................................... 122

Paper Input Menu............................................................................................... 126

Changing the paper input menu............................................................................. 126

Paper input menu parameters................................................................................ 127

List/Test Print Menu........................................................................................... 130

Printing a Configuration Page ................................................................................ 130

Interpreting the configuration page ........................................................................ 130

3

List/Test menu parameters .................................................................................... 132

Maintenance Menu............................................................................................. 134

Changing the maintenance menu .......................................................................... 134

Maintenance menu parameters ............................................................................. 136

System Menu...................................................................................................... 140

Changing the system menu ................................................................................... 140

System menu parameters ...................................................................................... 140

Host Interface Menu........................................................................................... 147

Changing the Host Interface menu ........................................................................ 147

Host Interface menu parameters............................................................................ 147

PCL Menu ........................................................................................................... 154

Changing the PCL menu........................................................................................ 154

PCL menu parameters ........................................................................................... 154

PS Menu.............................................................................................................. 157

Changing the PS menu .......................................................................................... 157

PS menu parameters ............................................................................................. 157

PDF Menu ........................................................................................................... 159

Changing the PDF menu........................................................................................ 159

PDF menu parameters........................................................................................... 159

Language Menu.................................................................................................. 162

Changing the language menu ................................................................................ 162

Language menu parameters .................................................................................. 162

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using Web Image Monitor................................................................................. 163

Displaying Top Page .............................................................................................. 164

About Menu and Mode........................................................................................... 165

Access in the Administrator Mode.......................................................................... 166

Displaying Web Image Monitor Help...................................................................... 166

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ............................................................. 168

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ............................................................... 169

Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration............................................ 170

Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel ................................................. 170

Changing the Paper Type ...................................................................................... 171

Managing User Information.................................................................................... 172

Configuring the Energy Saver Mode ...................................................................... 175

Setting a Password ................................................................................................ 175

Checking the Printer Status ................................................................................... 176

Changing Names and Comments .......................................................................... 176

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .............................................................. 178

Monitoring Printers ................................................................................................. 178

Checking the Printer Status ................................................................................... 178

When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ............................................ 179

Printer Status Notification by E-Mail................................................................ 180

Auto E-mail Notification.......................................................................................... 181

On-demand E-mail Notification .............................................................................. 181

Remote Maintenance by telnet ......................................................................... 182

4

Using telnet ............................................................................................................ 182 access .................................................................................................................... 183 appletalk................................................................................................................. 183 autonet ................................................................................................................... 184 btconfig................................................................................................................... 184 devicename............................................................................................................ 185 dhcp ....................................................................................................................... 185 diprint ..................................................................................................................... 186 dns ......................................................................................................................... 187 domainname .......................................................................................................... 188 help ........................................................................................................................ 189 hostname ............................................................................................................... 189 ifconfig.................................................................................................................... 190 info ......................................................................................................................... 191 ipp .......................................................................................................................... 191 netware .................................................................................................................. 192 passwd ................................................................................................................... 193 prnlog ..................................................................................................................... 194 rendezvous............................................................................................................. 194 route ....................................................................................................................... 196 set .......................................................................................................................... 197 show....................................................................................................................... 198 slp........................................................................................................................... 199 smb ........................................................................................................................ 199 snmp ...................................................................................................................... 200 sntp ........................................................................................................................ 203 spoolsw .................................................................................................................. 203 sprint ...................................................................................................................... 204 status...................................................................................................................... 204 syslog ..................................................................................................................... 205

upnp ...................................................................................................................... 205 web......................................................................................................................... 205 wiconfig .................................................................................................................. 206 wins ........................................................................................................................ 208

SNMP................................................................................................................... 210

Getting Printer Information over the Network................................................. 211

Current Printer Status ............................................................................................ 211

Printer configuration ............................................................................................... 217

Understanding the Displayed Information ...................................................... 219

Print Job Information .............................................................................................. 219

Print Log Information.............................................................................................. 219

Configuring the Network Interface Board ............................................................... 220

Message List ...................................................................................................... 226

System Log Information ......................................................................................... 226

Using a Printer Server

Preparing Printer Server ................................................................................... 232

Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .......................................... 232

5

Using NetWare ................................................................................................... 234

Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x) ........................................................... 235

Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5) ....................................... 236

Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 or 6/6.5 Environment..................................... 237

Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x) ...................................................... 240

Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5) .................................. 242

Special Operations under Windows

Printing Files Directly from Windows .............................................................. 246

Setup...................................................................................................................... 246

Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address........................................................ 246

Printing Commands................................................................................................ 248

Mac OS Configuration

Mac OS................................................................................................................ 251

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File .......................................... 251

Setting Up PPD Files ............................................................................................. 252

Creating a Desktop Printer Icon ............................................................................. 252

Setting Up Options ................................................................................................. 253

Installing the ColorSync Profiles ............................................................................ 253

Installing Adobe Type Manager ............................................................................. 254

Installing Screen fonts............................................................................................ 255

Using USB Interface............................................................................................... 255

Changing to EtherTalk ........................................................................................... 256

Mac OS X ............................................................................................................ 258

Installing the PPD Files .......................................................................................... 258

Setting Up the PPD File ......................................................................................... 258

Setting Up Options ................................................................................................. 259

Using USB Interface............................................................................................... 259

Using Rendezvous ................................................................................................. 259

Changing to EtherTalk ........................................................................................... 260

Configuring the Printer...................................................................................... 261

Using PostScript 3 ............................................................................................. 262

Job Type ................................................................................................................ 262

Duplex Printing....................................................................................................... 264

Color Mode............................................................................................................. 265

Gradation ............................................................................................................... 265

Color Profile ........................................................................................................... 265

Color Setting .......................................................................................................... 266

CMYK Simulation Profile........................................................................................ 267

Dithering................................................................................................................. 267

Gray Reproduction ................................................................................................. 267

Color Matching ....................................................................................................... 267

Printer Utility for Mac......................................................................................... 268

Installing Printer Utility for Mac............................................................................... 268

Starting Printer Utility for Mac ................................................................................ 269

Printer Utility for Mac Functions ............................................................................. 269

6

Appendix

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM ............................................. 276

Printer Drivers for This Printer................................................................................ 276

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin .............................................................................. 277

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ............................................................................... 278

Additional Information on the Printer Driver................................................... 281

Enable Large Papers ............................................................................................. 281

Cautions to Take When Using in a network .................................................... 282

Connecting a Dial-up Router to a Network............................................................. 282

Using DHCP........................................................................................................... 282

Configuring the WINS Server................................................................................. 284

Using the Dynamic DNS Function.......................................................................... 286

Configuring SSL Encryption............................................................................. 288

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption................................................................ 288

User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) ...................................................... 291

Installing Font Manager 2000............................................................................ 293

Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 ............................................ 294

When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame...................................... 295

Operating Environment .......................................................................................... 295

Supported Printer Drivers....................................................................................... 295

Limitations .............................................................................................................. 295

Cautions When Using Bluetooth Interface Unit .............................................. 297

Information about Installed Applications ........................................................ 298 expat ...................................................................................................................... 298

JPEG LIBRARY ..................................................................................................... 298

NetBSD .................................................................................................................. 298

Samba(Ver 2.2.2–1.1)............................................................................................ 300

RSA

®

BSAFE™ ..................................................................................................... 301

7

Read This First

Manuals for This Printer

For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual.

Setup Guide

Provides information about printer setup and options.

Maintenance Guide

Provides information about paper, replacing supplies, and dealing with paper jams and error messages.

Software Guide (HTML) (this manual)

Provides basic information about installing the printer driver and software, using the printer in a network environment, and configuration and setup.

Also, provides information about configuring and monitoring printer status using software and a Web browser.

❒ Some functions cannot be used depending on your printer.

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

8

Preparing for Printing

Quick Install

Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0 users can easily install this software using the CD-ROM provided.

Using Quick Install, the PCL printer driver and/or RPCS printer driver and Smart-

DeviceMonitor for Client is installed under network environment, and TCP/IP port will be set.

❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage

Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.

The Quick Install is not available when using this printer under USB connection. If you connect using USB, see p.59 “Installing the Printer Driver Using

USB” .

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ Quick Install ].

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

E

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ], and then click

[ Next ].

F

Select the printer model you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] dialog box.

For network connection via TCP/IP, select the printer whose IP address is displayed in [ Connect To ] .

For parallel connection, select the printer whose printer port is displayed in

[ Connect To ] .

G

Click [ Install ].

The printer driver installation starts.

H

Click [ Finish ]

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

9

Preparing for Printing

I

Click [ Exit ] in the first dialog box of the installer, and then take out the

CD-ROM.

❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

❒ Select a printer to whose IP address is displayed in [ Connect To ] to install

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client when using TCP/IP.

Quick Install is not available unless bidirectional communication between the printer and computer is enabled via parallel connection. See p.78 “If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled” for details about bidirectional communication between printer and computer.

10

Preparing for Printing

Confirming the Connection Method

This printer supports network and local connection.

Before installing the printer driver, check how the printer is connected. Follow the driver installation procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.

Network Connection

This printer can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.

Using this printer as the Windows printing port

Network connections can be established through Ethernet, IEEE 802.11b, and

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).

Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating system version and connection method used.

Windows 95/98

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Windows Me

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Windows 2000

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

None

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

LPR port

11

Preparing for Printing

Connection Method

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Windows XP

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

Available Ports

None

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

LPR port

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Windows Server 2003

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

LPR port

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Windows NT 4.0

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

LPR port

None

See the explanation of how to install the printer driver for each type of port.

For the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, see p.15 “Using the SmartDevice-

Monitor for Client Port” .

For the Standard TCP/IP port, see p.39 “Using the Standard TCP/IP Port” .

For the LPR port, see p.44 “Using the LPR Port” .

12

Preparing for Printing

Using as a network printer

This printer can be used as the Windows network printer, the NetWare print server, or the NetWare remote printer.

See the explanation of how to install the printer driver for each type of network printer.

For the Windows network printer, see p.49 “Using as the Windows Network

Printer” .

For the NetWare print server and remote printer, see p.56 “Using as the Net-

Ware Print Server/Remote Printer” .

Local Connection

Local connections can be established via parallel, USB, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections.

Windows operating system version determines the available connection methods.

• Windows 95:

• Parallel connections

• Windows 98:

• Parallel and Bluetooth connections

• Windows 98 SE/Me:

• USB, Parallel, and Bluetooth connections

• Windows 2000:

• USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections

• Windows XP:

• USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections

• Windows Server 2003:

13

Preparing for Printing

• USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections

• Windows NT 4.0:

• Parallel and Bluetooth connections

See the explanation of how to install the printer driver for each method of connection.

For the USB connection, see p.59 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB” .

For the parallel connection, see p.64 “Printing with Parallel Connection” .

For the IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) connection, see p.69 “Installing the Printer

Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)” .

For the Bluetooth connection, see p.73 “Printing with Bluetooth™ Connection” .

14

Preparing for Printing

Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Port

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

To install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.

❒ Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the printer driver when using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client / Admin ].

E

The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client installer starts.

F

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ], and then click [ Next > ].

The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client installer starts.

G

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box. After reading through its contents, click [ Yes ] to accept it.

H

Follow the instructions on the display to install SmartDeviceMonitor for

Client.

I

Click [ OK ].

If you are required to restart the computer after installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart the computer.

❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

15

Preparing for Printing

❒ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client supports following languages: Czech, Danish, German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Finnish, Swedish, Chinese Simple and Chinese

Traditional.

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (TCP/IP)

To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select the printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the printer model you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

K

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

16

Preparing for Printing

A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.

L

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

Under Windows 95/98/Me, you cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, if “192.168.0.20” is in use, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.

M

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

N

Set a User Code, if necessary.

This allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check statistics about the number of sheets which each user prints. For details, see

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. Neither alphabetic characters nor symbols are available.

O

Select the [ Default Printer ] check box to configure the printer as default.

P

Click [ Finish ].

Installation starts.

Q

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, install use [ Add Printer ] . See p.76

“If a Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (NetBEUI)

❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

❒ Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 do not support NetBEUI.

❒ You cannot print using printers beyond routers.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

17

Preparing for Printing

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe”on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click

[ Next ] .

F

Select the printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the printer model you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

K

Click [ NetBEUI ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using NetBEUI appears.

L

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the NetBEUI address. The NetBEUI address can be checked with the configuration page. For information about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configu r a t i o n P a g e ” . T h e N e t B E U I a d d r e s s a p p e a r s i n t h e f o r m a t o f

“\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path in the format of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Use “\\” instead of “%%” at the beginning.

M

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

N

Set a User Code, if necessary.

18

Preparing for Printing

This allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check statistics about the number of sheets which each user prints. For details, see

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. Neither alphabetic characters nor symbols are available.

O

Select the [ Default Printer ] check box to configure the printer as default.

P

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

Q

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using Web Image Monitor or Telnet.

To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See p.76 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (IPP)

❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage

Printers permission. For this, log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

19

Preparing for Printing

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the printer model you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

K

Click [ IPP ].

L

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://printer's address/printer” as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL( a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://printer's address/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed).

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://printer's address/ipp” as the printer's address.

M

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

N

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to make necessary settings.

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

O

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

P

Set a User Code, if necessary.

This allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check the number of sheets each user prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for

Admin Help.

20

Preparing for Printing

Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols can be entered.

Q

Select the [ Default Printer ] check box to configure the printer as default.

R

Click [ Finish ].

Installation starts.

S

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See p.76 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me -

TCP/IP)

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

21

Preparing for Printing

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

In the [ Available ports: ] box, click [ Printer Port ], and then click [ Next ].

I

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

L

Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click

[ Properties ].

M

On the [ Details ] tab, click [ Add Port… ].

N

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ] in the [ Other ] list, and then click [ OK ].

O

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.

P

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

You cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, if “192.168.0.20” is in use, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.

Q

Click [ OK ].

R

Check that the selected port is highlighted in [ Printer to the following port ], and then click [ OK ].

S

Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me -

NetBEUI)

A

Quit all applications currently running.

22

Preparing for Printing

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe”on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

In the [ Available ports: ] box, click [ Printer Port ], and then click [ Next ].

I

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

L

Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click

[ Properties ].

M

On the [ Details ] tab, click [ Add Port… ].

N

Click [ Other ] in the [ SmartDeviceMonitor ] list, and then click [ OK ].

O

Click [ NetBEUI ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using [ NetBEUI ] appears.

P

Click the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

23

Preparing for Printing

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the NetBEUI address. The NetBEUI address can be checked with the configuration page. For information about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configu r a t i o n P a g e ” . T h e N e t B E U I a d d r e s s a p p e a r s i n t h e f o r m a t o f

“\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path in the format of"%%Computer name\Share name". Use “\\” instead of “%%” at the beginning.

You cannot print using printers beyond routers.

Q

Click [ OK ].

R

Check that the selected port is highlighted in [ Printer to the following port ], and then click [ OK ].

S

Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - IPP)

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

24

Preparing for Printing

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

In the [ Available ports: ] box, click [ Printer Port ], and then click [ Next ].

I

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

L

Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click

[ Properties ].

M

On the [ Details ] tab, click [ Add Port… ].

N

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ] in the [ Other ] list, and then click [ OK ].

O

Click [ IPP ].

P

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed).

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.

Q

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

R

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to configure proxy server, IPP user name, and other settings. Make these settings, and then click [ OK ]. For details, see

Help on the CD-ROM.

❒ For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Help.

S

Click [ OK ].

25

Preparing for Printing

T

Check that the selected port is highlighted in [ Printer to the following port ], and then click [ OK ] .

U

Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next> ].

G

Click [ Add Port...

].

H

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.

J

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

26

Preparing for Printing

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

K

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

L

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

M

Click [ Next > ].

N

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next> ].

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 -

NetBEUI)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

27

Preparing for Printing

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next> ].

G

Click [ Add Port...

].

H

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Click [ NetBEUI ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using NetBEUI appears.

J

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the NetBEUI address. The NetBEUI address can be checked with the configuration page. For information about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configu r a t i o n P a g e ” . T h e N e t B E U I a d d r e s s a p p e a r s i n t h e f o r m a t o f

“\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path in the format of "%%Computer name\Share name". Use“%%” instead of “\\” at the beginning.

You cannot print using printers beyond routers.

K

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

L

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

M

Click [ Next > ].

N

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next> ].

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

28

Preparing for Printing

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next> ].

G

Click [ Add Port...

].

H

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Click [ IPP ].

J

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed).

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.

K

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the name of any existing port.

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

L

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to configure proxy server, the IPP user name and other settings. Specify the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

M

Click [ OK ].

N

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

29

Preparing for Printing

O

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

P

Click [ Next > ].

Q

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next> ].

R

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003 - TCP/IP)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe”on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next> ].

G

Click [ Create a new port: ].

H

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

30

Preparing for Printing

A list of printers using [ TCP/IP ] appears.

J

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

K

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

L

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

M

Click [ Next > ].

N

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next> ].

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003 - IPP)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

31

Preparing for Printing

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next> ].

G

Click [ Create a new port: ].

H

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Click [ IPP ].

J

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed).

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.

K

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

L

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to make necessary settings.

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

M

Click [ OK ].

N

Check that the name of the printer driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

O

Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

P

Click [ Next > ].

Q

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next> ].

R

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

32

Preparing for Printing

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 -

TCP/IP)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Add Port: ].

G

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

H

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using [ TCP/IP ] appears.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

J

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

K

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

33

Preparing for Printing

The printer driver installation starts.

M

Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 -

NetBEUI)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Add Port: ].

G

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

H

Click [ NetBEUI ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using NetBEUI appears.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

34

Preparing for Printing

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer are displayed. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify Address ] , and then enter the Net-

BEUI address. The NetBEUI address can be checked with the configuration page. For information about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page” . The NetBEUI address appears in the format of

“\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path in the format of "%%Computer name\Share name". Use "%%" instead of "\\" at the beginning.

You cannot print using printers beyond routers.

J

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

K

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

M

Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language is installed. The English printer driver is installed when either of the following languages is selected: Portuguese, Finnish.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

35

Preparing for Printing

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Add Port: ].

G

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

H

Click [ IPP ].

I

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer”as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed).

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.

J

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

K

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to make necessary settings.

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

L

Click [ OK ].

M

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

N

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

O

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

P

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

36

Preparing for Printing

Changing the Port Settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to change the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout, recovery/parallel printing, and printer groups.

❒ There are no settings for NetBEUI protocol.

Windows 95/98:

A

Open [ Printers ] window from [ Start ] menu.

B

In the [ Printers ] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

C

Click the [ Details ] tab, and then click [ Configure Port ].

The [ Port Settings ] dialog box appears.

Windows 2000 / Windows NT 4.0:

A

Open [ Printers ] window from [ Start ] menu.

B

In the [ Printers ] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

C

On the [ Ports ] tab, click [ Configure Port ].

The [ Port Settings ] dialog box appears.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

B

In the [ Printers ] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

C

Click the [ Details ] tab, and then click [ Configure Port ].

The [ Port Settings ] dialog box appears.

• For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.

❒ If no settings on the [ Recovery/Parallel Printing ] tab are available, follow the procedure below.

A Click [ Cancel ] to close the [ Port Configuration: ] dialog box.

B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the Smart-

DeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar.

37

Preparing for Printing

C Click [ Extended Features Settings ] , and then select the [ Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port ] check box.

D Click [ OK ] to close the [ Extended Features Settings ] dialog box.

• User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.

For information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Help.

38

Preparing for Printing

Using the Standard TCP/IP Port

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver

To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, and Windows

Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission.

Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the printer model you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

❒ The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ Standard TCP/IP ], and then click [ New Port...

].

Configure the Standard TCP/IP port settings, and then see Windows Help if

[ Standard TCP/IP Port ] does not appear.

K

Click [ Next ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

L

Enter the printer name or IP address in the [ Printer Name or IP Address ] box.

39

Preparing for Printing

The [ Port Name ] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name if necessary.

When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter

Driver C Model".

M

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

The installation start dialog box reappears.

N

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

O

Configure the default printer as necessary.

P

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

Q

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See p.76 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

40

Preparing for Printing

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next> ].

G

Click [ Add Port...

].

H

Click [ Standard TCP/IP ], and then click [ New Port...

].

I

Click [ Next ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

J

Enter the printer name or IP address in the [ Printer Name or IP Address ] box, and then click [ Next> ].

When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter

Driver C Model".

K

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

L

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

M

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

N

Click [ Next > ].

O

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next> ].

P

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

41

Preparing for Printing

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next> ].

G

Click [ Create a new port: ].

H

Click [ Standard TCP/IP ] in [ Create a new Port ], and then click [ Next ].

I

Click [ Standard TCP/IP ], and then click [ OK ].

J

Click [ Next ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

K

Enter the printer name or IP address in the [ Printer Name or IP Address ] box, and then click [ Next> ].

When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter

Driver C Model".

L

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

M

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

N

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

O

Click [ Next > ].

P

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next > ].

Q

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

42

Preparing for Printing

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

43

Preparing for Printing

Using the LPR Port

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver

To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the printer model you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

❒ The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ LPR Port ], and then click [ New Port...

].

If [ LPR Port ] does not appear, see Windows Help and install it.

K

Enter the printer's IP address in the [ Name or address of server providing lpd ] box.

44

Preparing for Printing

L

Enter “lp” in the [ Name of printer or print queue on that server ] box, and then click [ OK ].

The port is added.

M

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

N

Configure the default printer as necessary.

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts

P

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See p.76 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

45

Preparing for Printing

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next> ].

G

Click [ Add Port...

].

H

Click [ LPR Port ], and then click [ New Port...

].

I

Enter the printer's IP address in the [ Name or address of server providing lpd ] box.

J

Enter “lp” in the [ Name of printer or print queue on that server ] box, and then click [ OK ].

K

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

L

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

M

Click [ Next > ].

N

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next> ].

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. "If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory."

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

46

Preparing for Printing

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next> ].

G

Click [ Create a new port: ].

H

Click [ LPR Port ] in [ Create a new Port ], and then click [ Next> ].

I

Enter the printer's IP address in the [ Name or address of server providing lpd ] box.

J

Enter “lp” in the [ Name of printer or print queue on that server box ], and then click [ OK ].

K

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

L

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

M

Click [ Next > ].

N

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next> ].

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

47

Preparing for Printing

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Add Port: ].

G

Select [ LPR Port ], and then click [ OK ].

H

Enter the printer's IP address in the [ Name or address of server providing lpd box ] box.

I

Enter “lp” in the [ Name of printer or print queue on that server ] box, and then click [ OK ].

J

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

K

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

M

Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

48

Preparing for Printing

Using as the Windows Network Printer

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver

To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting "Network printer server", and then select the Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer.

This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print server. Do not begin the following procedure before the client is set up and configured correctly.

❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage

Printers permission. For this, log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

❒ If you print with a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing cannot be used from the client.

❒ If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, notification functions of SmartDeviceMonitor may not be used with the client.

❒ If you print with a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before you connect the print server to the printer.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

49

Preparing for Printing

G

Select the [ Printer Name ] check box to select the printer models you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ Network Printer ], and then click [ OK ].

K

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Browse for Printer ] window.

L

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

M

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

N

Configure the User Code as necessary.

For an RPCS printer driver, a User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

O

Select the [ Default Printer ] check box to configure the printer as default.

P

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

Q

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See p.76 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

50

Preparing for Printing

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Network Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ Browse ].

H

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Browse for Printer ] window.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

J

Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [ Next ].

K

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

M

Restart the computer.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

51

Preparing for Printing

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Network printer ], and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ Next ].

H

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Shared printers ] window.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

J

The printer driver installation starts.

K

Click [ Next> ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Click [ Finish ].

Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

52

Preparing for Printing

❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.

❒ If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, Smart-

DeviceMonitor notification functions may not be possible for the client.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Network printer ] and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ Next ].

H

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Shared printers ] window.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

J

The printer driver installation starts.

K

Click [ Next> ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Click [ Finish ].

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

53

Preparing for Printing

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.

❒ To print from a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before you connect the print server to the printer.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Network printer ], and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ Next ].

H

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Shared printers ] window.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

J

Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [ Next ].

K

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

L

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

Restart the computer to complete installation.

54

Preparing for Printing

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

55

Preparing for Printing

Using as the NetWare Print Server/Remote

Printer

This explains how to set up the Windows computer used as the NetWare client.

To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

The following explanation assumes NetWare Client is installed on the client computer and the NetWare server environment is correctly set up. Install all necessary client applications before following this procedure.

Set up the printer driver while logging on to the NetWare file server.

The following values are used in the example:

• Operating system: Windows 98

• NetWare version: 4.1

• File server name: CAREE

• Queue name: R-QUEUE

A

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

B

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

C

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

D

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

E

Select the printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

F

Select the [ Printer Name ] check box to select the printer models you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

G

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

56

Preparing for Printing

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

H

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

I

Click [ Network Printer ], and then click [ OK ].

J

Double-click the name of the NetWare file server on the network tree.

The created queue is displayed.

K

Select the print queue, and then click [ OK ].

L

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

M

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

N

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Component selection ] dialog box.

O

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Introduction complete ] dialog box.

P

In the [ Printers ] window, open the printer properties.

Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, open the printer properties from the [ Printers and Faxes ] window.

Q

On the [ Printer Settings ] tab, clear the [ Form Feed ] and [ Enable Banner ] check boxes.

Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, click the [ NetWare setting ] tab.

Do not select these check boxes since they are automatically selected by the printer driver. If you select the check boxes, the printer may not print correctly.

R

Click [ OK ] to close the printer properties dialog box.

❒ The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using Web Image Monitor or Telnet

When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Follow the procedure below to set up the PostScript 3 printer driver.

A

In the [ Printers ] or [ Printers and Faxes ] window, open the printer properties.

B

Click the [ PostScript ] tab.

❒ When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0, click the [ Device Settings ] tab, and then proceed to step to clear the check box.

57

Preparing for Printing

C

Click [ Advanced ].

D

Clear the [ Send CTRL+D before job ] and [ Send CTRL+D after job ] check boxes, and then click [ OK ].

E

Click [ OK ] to close the printer properties dialog box.

Form Feed

Do not use NetWare to configure form feed. Form feed is controlled by the printer driver on Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer may not print properly.

Follow the procedure below to disable form feed according to the operating system used:

• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [ Form feed ] check box on the [ Printer Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

• Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear the [ Form feed ] check box on the [ NetWare Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

Banner Page

Do not use NetWare to configure a banner page.

Follow the procedure below to disable banner pages according to the operating system used:

• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [ Enable banner ] check box on the [ Printer

Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

• Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear the [ Enable banner ] check box on the [ NetWare Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

Printing after Resetting the Printer

Printer to print server connection requires 30 - 40 seconds to resume after the printer is reset. During this period, jobs may be accepted (depending on Net-

Ware specifications) but not printed.

To print after resetting the printer as the remote printer, check on the print server that the remote printer is disconnected, or wait for two minutes before trying to print.

58

Preparing for Printing

Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.

Make sure that printer is connected to the computer's USB ports using the

USB interface cable.

Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are in progress.

The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

Windows 98 SE/Me - USB

❒ Installation via USB is not possible under Windows 95/98. Upgrade to Windows 98 SE/Me.

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the "USB" port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

A

Check that the power of the printer is off.

B

Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.

C

Turn on the power of the printer.

The plug and play function starts and the [ New Hardware Found ] , [ Device Driver

Wizard ] , or [ Add New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box appears, depending on the operating system.

D

Click [ Next> ].

E

Click [ Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.

], and then click

[ Next> ].

F

Select the [ Specify a location: ] check box, and then click [ Browse...

].

The [ Browse for Folder ] dialog box appears.

G

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

❒ When Auto Run starts, click [ Exit ] .

❒ To disable Auto Run, press the { Shift } key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the

CD-ROM.

H

Specify the location where USB Printing Support is located, and then click [ Next> ].

59

Preparing for Printing

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of USB Printing Support are stored in the following location:

D:DRIVESRPCSWIN98_ME

I

Check the location, and then click [ Next ].

USB Printing Support is installed.

J

Click [ Finish ].

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

K

Click [ Next> ].

L

Click [ Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.

], and then click

[ Next> ].

M

Select the [ Specify a location: ], check box, and then click [ Browse...

].

The [ Browse for Folder ] dialog box appears.

N

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

❒ When Auto Run starts, click [ Exit ] .

❒ To disable Auto Run, press the { Shift } key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the

CD-ROM.

O

Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored, and then click [ Next> ].

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

• RPCS

D:DRIVESRPCSWIN98_ME(Language)DISK1

• PCL 5c

D:DRIVESPCL5cWIN98_ME(Language)DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:DRIVESPS3WIN98_ME(Language)DISK1

P

Check the location, and then click [ Next ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

Q

Click [ Finish ].

Installation is complete. If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

60

Preparing for Printing

The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.

It is not necessary to reinstall USB Printing Support when connecting a different printer via USB interface when USB Printing Support is installed.

After installing USB Printing Support, if the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer.

Install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with the printer.

Windows 2000 - USB

❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the "USB" port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.

A

Check that the power of the printer is off.

B

Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.

C

Turn on the power of the printer.

Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.

D

Click [ Next ] in the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box.

E

Select the [ Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) ] check box, and then click [ Next ]."

F

Select the [ Specify location ] check box, and then click [ Next ].

G

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

❒ When Auto Run starts, click [ Exit ] .

To disable Auto Run, press the left { Shift } key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.

H

Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

61

Preparing for Printing

• RPCS

D:DRIVESRPCSWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

• PCL 5c

D:DRIVESPCL5cWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:DRIVESPS3WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

I

Check the printer driver location, and then click [ OK ].

J

Click [ Next ].

K

Click [ Finish ].

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB

Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the "USB" port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.

A

Check that the power of the printer is off.

B

Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.

C

Turn on the power of the printer.

Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.

D

In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [ Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended] ], and then click [ Next> ].

E

To disable Auto Run, press the left { SHIFT } key when inserting the CD-

ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.

62

Preparing for Printing

If Auto Run starts, click [ Cancel ] , and then [ Exit ] .

F

Select the [ Include this location in the search ] check box under [ Search for the best driver in these location ], and then click [ Browse ] to select the printer driver location.

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

• RPCS

D:DRIVESRPCSWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

• PCL 5c

D:DRIVESPCL5cWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:DRIVESPS3WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

G

Check the printer driver location, and then click [ Next ].

H

Click [ Continue ].

I

Click [ Finish ].

If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.

Troubleshooting USB

Problem

The printer is not recognized automatically.

Windows has already configured the USB settings.

Solutions

Turn off the power of the printer, reconnect the USB cable, and then turn it on again.

Open Windows' Device Manager, and then, under [ Universal Serial Bus controllers ] , remove any conflicting devices.

Conflicting devices have a yellow [ !

] or [ ?

] icon by them.

Take care not to accidentally remove required devices.

For details, see Windows Help.

When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server

2003, an erroneous device is displayed under [ USB

Controller ] in the [ Device Manager ] dialog box.

63

Preparing for Printing

Printing with Parallel Connection

To use a printer connected using a parallel interface, click [ LPT1 ] when installing the printer driver.

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver

❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the [ Printer Name ] check box to select the printer models you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Check that [ LPT1: ] is shown in [ Port: ].

J

Select the [ Default Printer ] check box to configure the printer as default.

K

Click [ Finish ].

64

Preparing for Printing

The printer driver installation starts.

L

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete. Restart the computer and reinstall other software programs or printer drivers.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See p.76 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

In the [ Available ports: ] box, click [ Printer Port ], and then click [ Next ].

I

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

65

Preparing for Printing

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language is installed. The English printer driver is installed when either of the following languages is selected: Portuguese, Finnish.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

I

Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

J

Restart the computer to complete installation.

66

Preparing for Printing

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

G

Select the port you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

H

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

I

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

Restart the computer to complete installation.

67

Preparing for Printing

A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)

❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Select the port you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

I

Click [ Next ].

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

Restart the computer to complete installation.

❒ A User Code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about User Code, see the printer driver Help.

68

Preparing for Printing

Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394

(SCSI print)

The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

Quit all applications currently running, and do not print during installation.

❒ Do not connect IEEE 1394 or USB devices to the computer or turn on another printers during installation.

Before uninstalling the printer driver, check that the IEEE 1394 interface cable is disconnected from the computer.

SCSI print must be set to "active" from the control panel. For details, see p.147 “Host Interface Menu” .

This printer can receive print data from one computer at a time only. An message may appear if jobs from different computers collide.

If jobs collide, the first received is printed first.

❒ When the printer driver is properly installed, connecting or disconnecting the optional IEEE 1394 cable causes the printer icon to change.

Windows 2000

❒ If [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] appears every time the computer is started or the cable is connected, disable the device. To install another printer driver after setting the "1394_00n" port, click [1394_00] as a port during the printer driver installation.

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

The optional 1394 interface unit can be used only with Service Pack 1 (SP1) or higher.

A

Connect the printer and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.

B

Click [ Next ] in the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box.

C

When the message "This wizard will complete the installation for this

Device: Unknown" appears, click [ Specify a location ], and then click [ Next> ].

D

When the message "Locate Driver Files" appears, select the [ Optional search locations ] check box, and then click [ Specify a location ], and then click

[ Next> ].

69

Preparing for Printing

E

To disable Auto Run, press the left { SHIFT } key when inserting the CD-

ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.

If Auto Run starts, click [ Cancel ] , and then [ Exit ] .

F

Click [ Browse ].

G

Select the printer driver you want to use.

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

• RPCS

D:DRIVESRPCSWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

• PCL 5c

D:DRIVESPCL5cWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:DRIVESPS3WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

H

Click [ Open ].

I

Click [ OK ].

J

Follow the instructions.

When installation is complete, the printer connected to "1394_00n" appears in the [ Printers ] window. ("n" shows the number of printers connected.)

If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to the [ Printers ] window. In this case, printer driver installation is not necessary.

❒ If printing does not work properly after the installation, delete the port and reinstall the printer driver. For details, see "Printer Does Not Print", Maintenance Guide .

❒ If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the device by following the procedure below.

A When the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box appears, click [ Next> ] .

B When the message "This wizard will complete the installation for this

Device: Unknown" appears, select the [ Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended] ] check box, and then click [ Next> ] .

C When the message "Please choose your search and installation option." appears, clear all check boxes from [ Search for the best driver in these locations.

] , and then click [ Next> ] .

70

Preparing for Printing

D When the message "Driver Files Search Results" appears, select the

[ Disable the device. The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the control Panel can be able to complete the driver installations.

] check box, and then click [ Finish ] .

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003

SCSI print must be set to "active" from the control panel. For details, see p.147 “Host Interface Menu” .

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

This printer can receive print data from one computer at a time only. If a job from a computer collides with other data, a message may appear on the computer.

❒ To install another printer driver after setting the "1394_00n" port, click

[ 1394_00 ] as a port during the printer driver installation.

❒ When the printer driver is properly installed, connecting or disconnecting the optional IEEE 1394 cable causes the printer icon to change.

A

Connect the printer and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.

When the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box appears, check that [ This wizard helps you install software for: (Unknown) ] is displayed.

B

Select the [ Install from a list on specific location (Advanced) ] check box, and then click [ Next> ].

C

When the message "Please choose your search and installation option." appears, select the [ Search for the best driver in these locations.

] check box, select the [ Include this location in the search: ] check box, and then select the [ Include this location in the search: ] check box.

D

To disable Auto Run, press the left { SHIFT } key when inserting the CD-

ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.

❒ If Auto Run starts, click [ Cancel ] , and then [ Exit ] .

E

Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored, and then click [ Next ].

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

• RPCS

71

Preparing for Printing

D:DRIVESRPCSWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

• PCL 5c

D:DRIVESPCL5cWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:DRIVESPS3WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1

When installation is complete, the printer connected to "1394_00n" appears in the [ Printers and Faxes ] window. ("n" shows the number of printers connected.)

F

Follow the instructions.

❒ If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to the [ Printers and Faxes ] window. In this case, printer driver installation is not necessary.

Even if the printer driver is already installed, the message " Found New

Hardware Wizard" may appear when the printer and the computer are connected using the IEEE 1394 interface cable for the first time. If it does, install the printer driver.

❒ If printing does not work properly after the installation, delete the port and reinstall the printer driver. For details, see "Printer Does Not Print", Maintenance Guide .

If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the device by following the procedure below

A When the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box appears, check that

[ This wizard helps you install software for: Unknown ] displayed, select [ Install from a list on specific location (Advanced) ] check box, and then click [ Next> ] .

B When the message "Please choose your search and installation option." appears, clear all check boxes from [ Search for the best driver in these locations.

] , and then click [ Next> ] .

C When the message "The wizard could not find the software on your computer for." appears, click [ OK ] .

D When the message "Cannot Install this Hardware" appears, select the

[ Don't prompt again to install the software ] check box, and then click [ Finish ] .

72

Preparing for Printing

Printing with Bluetooth™ Connection

Supported Profiles

SPP, HCRP

• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers can be connected at the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by

SPP, one by HCRP.

• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer at the same time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, cancel the first established connection.

• Conditions for bidirectional communications

• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.

• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.

BIP

• For BIP connection, a module including PostScript 3 must be installed in the printer.

• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.

• Only JPEG images that can be printed using BIP.

• User Code are disabled for BIP.

You cannot print if print functions are restricted.

• Some printers do not support BIP.

Printing with Bluetooth™ Connection

To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel interface.

To install the printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

❒ System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and specifications. For details, see the manuals provided with each product.

❒ For information about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems or using it with different utilities, see the manuals provided with those operating systems or utilities.

73

Preparing for Printing

A

Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

B

Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

C

On the [ Tool ] menu, click [ COM port ].

D

Check that the message "Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) " appears under Client Ports. (X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth™.)

E

Click [ Close ].

F

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

G

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

H

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

I

Click the [ Ports ] tab.

J

Under [ Port ], select the [ COMx: ] check box. X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth™.

K

Click [ OK ].

Close the [ Printers ] window.

If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network connection as follows:

A Select the printer you want to use in the [ Printers and Faxes ] box.

B Click [ Connect ] .

To always use the same printer, select the [ Always use for this connection ] check box.

For details, see the manuals provided with the Bluetooth adaptor or computer equipped with Bluetooth.

Configuring Security Mode Settings

A

Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

B

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ Security Mode ].

The [ Security Mode ] dialog box appears.

C

Select the security mode in the [ Security Mode: ] list.

74

Preparing for Printing

If you click [ High ] , or [ Custom ] , and specify [ Link ] in the [ Custom Settings ] dialog box, enter the Bluetooth password. For information about entering the password, see p.75 “Send the print job to the printer in use.”

For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.

For information about each mode, see the manuals provided with the utility.

D

Click [ OK ].

Close the [ Security Mode ] dialog box.

For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager Help. For details about the password entry which is required to transmit print jobs, see p.75 “Printing in the Security Mode” .

Printing in the Security Mode

A

Send the print job to the printer in use.

Depending on the computer configuration, the [ Connect ] dialog box may appear. If it does, use it to establish the network connection.

B

The [ Authentication ] dialog box appears.

C

Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [ OK ].

As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the printer's serial number. You can find the serial number on the label on the back of the printer.

For example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth password is

1234.

D

The print job is sent.

The Bluetooth password differs for each printer and cannot be changed.

75

Preparing for Printing

If a Message Appears during Installation

Message number 58 or 34 indicates the printer driver cannot be installed using

Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [ Add Printer ] or [ >Install Printer ] .

For Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4.0:

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

B

Double-click the Add Printer icon.

C

Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.

❒ If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is either DRIVERSRPCSWIN9X_ME, DRIVERSRPCSWIN2K_XP, or

DRIVERSRPCS T4. If the installer starts, click [ Cancel ] to quit.

For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003:

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

B

Click [ Add a printer ].

C

Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.

❒ If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is DRIVERSRPCSWIN2K_XP. If the installer starts, click [ Cancel ] to quit.

For Windows XP Home Editions:

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Control Panel ].

B

Click [ Printers and Other Hardware ].

C

Click [ Printers and Faxes ].

D

Click [ Install Printer ].

E

Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.

If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP. If the installer starts, click [ Cancel ] to quit.

76

Preparing for Printing

Making Option Settings for the Printer

Make option settings for the printer using the printer driver when bidirectional communication is disabled.

For details about making option settings for the printer, see p.78 “If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled” .

Conditions for Bidirectional Communication

Bidirectional communication allows information about paper size and feed direction settings to be automatically sent to the printer. You can check printer status from your computer.

• Bidirectional communication is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP,

Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.

• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional communication is enabled under Windows 2000, the [ Change Accessories ] tab is unavailable.

❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional communications and updates the printer status automatically.

❒ The PCL printer driver supports bidirectional communications. You can update printer status manually.

❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional communications.

To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:

When connected with parallel cables

• The computer must support bidirectional communication.

• The printer must support bidirectional communication.

• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.

• The printer must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cables and parallel connectors.

• Under Windows 2000, [ Enable bidirectional support ] must be selected, and

[ Enable printer pooling ] must not be selected on the [ port ] tab with the RPCS printer driver.

When connected with the network

• The printer must support bidirectional communication.

• SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used.

77

Preparing for Printing

• Under Windows 2000, [ Enable bidirectional support ] must be selected, and

[ Enable printer pooling ] must not be selected on the [ port ] tab with the RPCS printer driver.

• In addition to the above, one of the following conditions must also be met:

• The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port and the TCP/IP protocol must be used.

• The standard TCP/IP port must be used without changing the default port name (for Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003).

• Microsoft TCP/IP print IP address must be specified for use (for Windows NT 4.0).

• IPP port name must include the IP address when using the IPP protocol.

When connected with IEEE 1394

• The computer must support bidirectional communication.

• The printer must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.

• [ Activate ] must be selected in the SCSI print of IEEE 1394 and [ Activate ] must be selected in the Bidi-SCSI print.

• Under Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, [ Enable bidirectional support ] must be selected, and [ Enable printer pooling ] must not be selected on the [ port ] tab with RPCS printer driver.

When connected with USB

The printer must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.

The computer must support bidirectional communication.

❒ Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM provided.

If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled

Set up option settings when bidirectional communications are disabled.

❒ Under Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties in the [ Printers ] folder. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

Under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control permission is required to change the printer properties in the [ Printers ] folder. Log on as an Administrators or Power

Users group member.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

78

Preparing for Printing

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

D

Click the [ Accessories ] tab.

If options in the [ Change Accessories ] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection is enabled. In this case, no change is necessary for option settings.

❒ If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [ Change Accessories ] tab.

❒ If you are using the PS printer driver, click the [ Device Settings ] tab.

E

Select options installed from the [ Option ] area, and then make the necessary settings.

F

Select the total amount of the memory in [ Total memory: ], when the optional SDRAM module is added.

G

Under [ Paper source tray settings ], click and highlight the tray to be used, and then select the appropriate size, position, and type for the tray. Select the [ Tray locking ] check box to exclude the tray from the targets of automatic tray selection.

H

Click [ OK ] to close the printer properties dialog box. Click the [ Defaults ] tab, and then click [ Change Accessories ] to display the option selection.

Click [ OK ] to close the printer properties dialog box. Click the [ Defaults ] tab, and then click [ Change Accessories ] to display the option selection.

79

Setting Up the Printer Driver

PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.

Making printer default settings

To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from the [ Printers ] window.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

80

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

❒ Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

81

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.

❒ The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

82

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

83

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.

The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

84

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Default

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Document Defaults ].

The [ Default ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.

85

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

86

Setting Up the Printer Driver

RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two dialog box types of the printer properties dialog box.

"Multi-tab" is used as an example in this manual. For details about changing the dialog box types, see the printer driver Help.

Multi-tab

This dialog box type is designed for users who often change print settings to perform various printing operations.

Custom Setting

This dialog box type is designed for users who rarely change print settings.

This type of dialog box may vary depending on the installed options.

Making printer default settings

To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from the [ Printers ] window.

❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

❒ When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the

RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [ OK ] , the printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

87

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.

❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

88

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

❒ When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the

RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [ OK ] , the printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

❒ Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.

89

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

❒ When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the

RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [ OK ] , the printer properties dialog box appears.

90

Setting Up the Printer Driver

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

❒ Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.

❒ The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

91

Setting Up the Printer Driver

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

❒ When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the

RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [ OK ] , the printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

❒ Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

92

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Making printer default settings - Default

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Document Defaults...

].

The [ Default ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.

❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

93

Setting Up the Printer Driver

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

94

Setting Up the Printer Driver

PostScript 3 - Setting Up for Printing

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.

Making printer default settings

To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from the [ Printers ] window.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

E

Click [ OK ].

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.

❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

95

Setting Up the Printer Driver

❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

96

Setting Up the Printer Driver

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.

❒ The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Print ] to start printing.

97

Setting Up the Printer Driver

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

98

Setting Up the Printer Driver

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.

❒ The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Print ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

99

Setting Up the Printer Driver

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears .

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

❒ Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Default

❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Document Defaults ].

The [ Default ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

100

Setting Up the Printer Driver

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.

The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see Printer Driver Help.

Mac OS - Setting Up for Printing

Making paper settings from an application

A

Open the file you want to print.

B

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Page Setup ].

C

Check that the printer you want to use is displayed in [ Format for: ], and then select the paper size you want to use in [ Paper ].

Under Mac OS X, select the paper size in [ Paper Size ] .

If the printer you want to use is not displayed in [ Format for: ] , select the printer you want to use.

101

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The [ Page Setup ] dialog box varies depending on the application you use.

For details, see the manuals provided with the Mac OS.

D

Configure the settings, and then click [ OK ].

Setting up for printing from an application

A

Open the file you want to print.

B

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

C

Check that the printer is selected in the [ Printer ] list, and then make the printer settings.

D

Configure the settings, and then click [ OK ].

102

Other Print Operations

Printing a PDF File Directly

You can send PDF files directly to this printer to print, without opening its application.

❒ This is possible for Adobe PDF files only.

PDF files of versions 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 are supported.

Transparency and JBIG2 which are functions of version 1.4 are not supported.

Functions of 1.5 file format are not supported.

Using DeskTopBinder Lite

PDF files added with DeskTopBinder Lite can be sent directly to this printer for printing.

❒ The RPCS printer driver must be installed.

❒ PDF Direct Print is not available with some versions of DeskTopBinder Lite.

Use DeskTopBinder Lite installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

❒ PDF Direct Print settings can be made from PDF Direct Print properties.

❒ To print password-protected PDF files, you must do the following:

• Enter the PDF password using PDF Direct Print properties.

• Using the control panel, press [ PDF: Change PW ] on the [ PDF ] menu to set the PDF password.

If a group password is set with DeskTopBinder Lite, set the group password by pressing [ PDF Group PW ] on the [ PDF ] menu using the control panel.

For details, see DeskTopBinder Lite Help.

Installing DeskTopBinder Lite

Follow the procedure below to install DeskTopBinder Lite.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

103

Other Print Operations

Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case, launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ DeskTopBinder Lite ] , and then click [ Next ].

E

Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTopBinder Lite.

If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTopBinder Lite, restart the computer and continue the configuration.

Using Commands

Under Windows and UNIX, you can print PDF files directly, using commands such as "ftp" and "lpr".

For details about printing using commands under Windows, see p.246 “Printing Files Directly from Windows” .

For details about printing using commands under UNIX, see UNIX Supplement.

104

Other Print Operations

Sample Print

Use this function to print the first set of a multiple-set print job. After checking the results, the remaining sets can be printed using the control panel. This function can protect you from printing a large quantity of misprints.

❒ To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.

❒ The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents of the print images. At most, the printer can save 30 jobs or 1100 pages for

Sample Print and Locked Print. At most, the printer can store up to 1000 pages for 1 job.

If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.

❒ Sample Print files will not appear on the panel display if they have already been executed or deleted using the Web browser before you select "Sample

Print" from the control panel.

Sample Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor, after you select [ Sample Print ] using the control panel will appear on the display panel.

However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those Sample Print files.

❒ You can identify the file you want to print by the user ID and the time when the job was stored.

❒ If the first set of the Sample Print file is not as you expected and you do not want to print the remaining sets, delete the Sample Print file using the control panel or Web Image Monitor.

The job in the printer is deleted automatically after all Sample Print files are printed.

Follow the procedure below to use this function with the PCL or RPCS printer driver under Windows. If you want to use this function under Mac OS, see

Postscript 3 Supplement.

For details about settings for the printer driver, see the printer driver Help.

Files specified for Sample Print can be printed or deleted using Web Image

Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Printing the First Set

A

From an application, select a command to print.

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

105

Other Print Operations

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appear.

C

In the [ Job type: ] box, click [ Sample Print ].

D

In the [ User ID: ] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric characters.

This is used to identify the user. The user ID can be entered using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.

E

Execute a command to print.

The job is saved on the hard disk.

F

Check the print job, and then use the control panel to print the remaining sets or delete them.

p.106 “Printing the Remaining Sets” p.107 “Deleting a Sample Print File”

Printing the Remaining Sets

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Sample Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to print, and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Check that [ Print File ] is displayed, and then press the { # Enter } key.

The number of remaining sets appears.

106

Other Print Operations

To cancel printing, press the { Escape } key.

E

Press the { # Enter } key. To change the number of sets you want to print, press the {U} or {T} key and select the number of sets, and then press the { # Enter } key.

After the job is printed, the job saved on the hard disk is deleted.

Deleting a Sample Print File

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Sample Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to delete, and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Delete File ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Sample Print file, press the { Escape } key.

E

Press the { # Enter } key to delete the file.

The message [ Deleted ] appears.

F

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

Checking the Error Log

When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can be checked using the control panel.

107

Other Print Operations

The error log displays up to 20 of the newest jobs. If you turn off the power, the errors will be deleted.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Sample Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Error File(s) ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to check the log.

To print error files, either print or delete the file saved on the hard disk, and then print the file from the computer again.

E

When you finish checking the error log, press the { Escape } key.

The Sample Print job selection screen appears.

F

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

108

Other Print Operations

Locked Print

Use this function to print confidential documents. Documents will not be printed automatically unless a password is entered using the control panel.

❒ To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.

The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the print image content. At most, the printer can store 30 jobs or 1100 pages for Sample

Print and Locked Print. At most, the printer can store a maximum of 1000 pages for a single job.

❒ If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.

❒ Locked Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor before you select [ Locked

Print ] using the control panel.

❒ Locked Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have selected [ Locked Print ] using the control panel will still appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those

Locked Print files.

❒ Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases. You can check the error log for jobs not saved.

• When there are 30 Sample Print and Locked Print jobs saved on the hard disk.

• When the total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 1000 pages.

❒ You can identify the file you want to print by the user ID and the time when the job was stored.

❒ After the Locked Print file is printed, the job in the printer is deleted automatically.

❒ Follow the procedure below to use this function with the PCL printer driver or

RPCS printer driver under Windows. If you want to use this function under

Mac OS, see Postscript 3 Supplement.

For details about settings for the printer driver, see the printer driver Help.

Files specified for Locked Print can be printed or deleted using Web Image

Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Sending Print Job to the Printer

A

From an application, select a command to print.

109

Other Print Operations

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

C

In the [ Job type: ] box, click [ Locked Print ].

D

In the [ User ID: ] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric characters.

This is used to identify the user. The user ID can be entered using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.

E

In the [ Password: ] box, enter a four to eight digit password (0-9).

F

Execute a command to print.

The job is saved on the hard disk.

G

Enter the password using the control panel, and then specify whether to print or delete the job.

p.110 “Entering a Password” p.111 “Deleting a Locked Print File”

Entering a Password

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Locked Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to print, and then press the { # Enter } key.

110

Other Print Operations

D

Enter the password. Press the {U} or {T} key to enter the leftmost digit of the password, and then press the { # Enter } key.

E

The next digit appears.

F

Repeat step to enter all the digits of the password, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

G

Check that [ Print File ] is displayed, and then press the { # Enter } key.

To cancel printing, press the { Escape } key.

H

Press the { # Enter } key.

After the job is printed, the job saved on the hard disk is deleted.

Deleting a Locked Print File

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Locked Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to delete.

D

Enter the password of the Locked Print file. Press the {U} or {T} key to enter the leftmost digit of the password, and then press the { # Enter } key.

E

The next digit appears.

F

Repeat step to enter all the digits of the password, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

G

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Delete File ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Locked Print file, press the { Escape } key.

111

Other Print Operations

H

Press the { # Enter } key.

The message [ Deleted ] appears, and then the Locked Print job selection screen appears.

Checking the Error Log

When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can be checked using the control panel.

The error log displays up to 20 of the newest jobs. If you turn off the power, the errors will be deleted.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Locked Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Error File(s) ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to check the log.

To print error files, either print or delete the file saved on the hard disk, and then print the file from the computer again.

E

When you finish checking the error log, press the { Escape } key.

The Locked Print job selection screen appears.

F

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

112

Other Print Operations

Form Feed

The message is displayed when there is no paper in the paper that does not agrees with the size and form specified by the printer driver, or there is no paper.

You can form feed using tray.

A

Press the { Form Feed } key, and then select the paper tray on the screen.

B

Press the { Enter } key.

The job is printed from the selected tray.

113

Other Print Operations

Canceling a Print Job

You can cancel printing from either the printer or a client computer. Since canceling procedures vary depending on the print job status, check the job status and cancel printing according to the following procedure.

Windows - Canceling a Print Job

When the printer is connected to multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel other users' print jobs.

If the print job you want to cancel is being printed

A

Check if the print job you want to cancel is currently being printed.

While the print job may not be being printed, the printer is receiving data if the

Data In indicator is lit or blinking.

B

Press the { Job Reset } key.

The [ Job Reset?

] screen appears.

C

Select the current job or all jobs (including the current job) using the {U} or {T} key.

It is also possible to annul the cancellation. Printing resumes if you select

[ Resume Print ] , and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press the { # Enter } key.

A confirmation message appears.

Printing resumes if you press the { Escape } key after the message appears.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

The job is canceled. When the cancellation procedure is complete, a message appears.

❒ A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time to cancel.

❒ If printing resumes after being canceled, the period of time set for [ I/O Timeout ] is too short. Set a longer period of time for [ I/O Timeout ] on the [ Host Interface ] menu.

114

Other Print Operations

If the print job you want to cancel is not being printed

A

Double-click the printer icon on the Windows task tray.

A window appears showing all print jobs that are currently queuing to be printed. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.

You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the printer icon in the [ Printer ] window.

B

Select the name of the job you want to cancel.

C

On the [ Document ] menu, click [ Cancel Printing ].

When this printer is used as a network printer, other users' print jobs cannot be canceled from a client computer.

Clicking [ Purge Print Documents ] on the [ printer ] menu deletes all currently queued print jobs. However, when this printer is used as a network printer, print jobs from other users' computer cannot be canceled from a client computer.

❒ When the print job you selected starts printing, it takes some time before the print job disappears from the printer window.

Mac OS - Canceling a Print Job

❒ When the printer is connected to multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel other users' print jobs.

If the print job you want to cancel is being printed

A

Check if the print job you want to cancel is currently being printed.

While the print job may not be being printed, the printer is receiving data if the

Data In indicator is lit or blinking.

B

Press the { Job Reset } key.

[ Job Reset?

] appears on the panel display.

C

Select the current job or all jobs (including the current job) using the {U} or {T} key.

It is also possible to annul the cancellation. Printing resumes if you select

[ Resume Print ] , and then press { # Enter } key.

D

Press the { # Enter } key.

A confirmation message appears.

115

Other Print Operations

Printing resumes if you press the { Escape } key after the message appears.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

The job is canceled. When the cancellation procedure is complete, a message appears.

❒ A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time to cancel.

❒ To secure enough time for sending a command to cancel printing, set a long period of time in [ I/O Timeout ] on the [ Host Interface ] menu.

If the print job you want to cancel is not being printed

A

Double-click the printer icon on the desktop.

A window appears showing all print jobs that are currently queuing to be printed. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.

Under Mac OS X, start Print Center.

B

Select the name of the job you want to cancel.

C

Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon.

❒ When this printer is used as a network printer, other users' print jobs cannot be canceled from a client computer.

116

Other Print Operations

Caution During Printing

Collate

The Collate function allows you to print while sorting printouts into page-ordered sets, such as when printing multiple copies of meeting materials.

For details about collate and job separation, see the printer driver Help.

Collate

Output can be assembled as sets in sequential order.

❒ To use these functions, an optional memory unit of at least 256 MB or the optional hard disk drive must be installed on the printer.

❒ Up to 150 pages can be sorted using RAM. If the optional hard disk drive is installed, up to 1000 pages can be sorted.

Spool Printing

With Spool Printing, the print data is saved in the hard disk before printing. To use this function, set it from the menu. See p.203 “spoolsw” .

Do not turn off the printer or the computer when a print job is being spooled and the Data In indicator is blinking. The print job will remain in the hard disk and be printed when the printer is turned on. The setting can be changed using the “spoolsw clear job” command on the telnet

❒ The Spool Printing function is available when the optional hard disk is installed.

❒ The Spool Printing function is available for data received using diprint, lpr, ipp, ftp, and smb.

❒ When using diprint, the Spool Printing function cannot be used with bidirectional communication.

The domain reserved for spool printing is about 1 GB.

❒ When Spool Printing is on, the size of a single print job cannot exceed 500

MB.

117

Other Print Operations

❒ When sending print jobs spooled from several computers, up to one diprint job, 10 lpr jobs, one ipp job, one ftp job, and one smb job can be spooled. Jobs exceeding this spooling capacity cannot be executed. It is necessary to wait to add new jobs.

❒ First pages take longer to print when using spool printing.

With Spool Printing, the computer is freed from print processing earlier, even when processing a large amount of data.

❒ Spool jobs stored in the printer can be viewed or deleted using Web Image

Monitor.

For information about the “spoolsw clear job” command on the telnet, see p.203 “spoolsw” .

Setting Spool Printing

Spool printing settings can be made using telnet or Web Image Monitor.

• Using Web Image Monitor

In [ System ] on the [ Configuration ] menu, click [ Enable ] in [ Spool Printing ] .

For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

• Using telnet

Enter "spoolsw spool on".

For details, see p.203 “spoolsw” .

Checking or deleting spooled jobs using Web Image Monitor

Follow the procedure below to check or delete spooled jobs using Web Image

Monitor.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar to access the printer whose settings you want to change.

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

C

Click [ Login ].

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

D

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

To use the default account, enter "admin" as user name, and leave the password blank.

E

In the menu area, click [ Job ].

A submenu will appear.

F

On the [ printer ] menu, click [ Spool Printing ].

118

Other Print Operations

A list of spooled jobs appears.

G

To delete a job, select the check box of the job you want to delete, and then click [ Delete ].

The selected job is deleted.

H

Quit Web Image Monitor.

For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Cover

Using this function, you can insert cover and back sheets fed from a different tray to that of the main paper, and print on them.

❒ To use this function, Collate must be set. Rotating Collate can not be set.

❒ The cover sheets should be the same size and orientation as the body of the paper.

❒ If Auto Tray Select is set as the paper feed tray for the body paper, the paper will be delivered from a tray containing paper from a tray containing paper in the portrait direction. Therefore, if the cover paper is set to landscape orientation, the orientation cover and body will be different.

For printing methods, see Printer Driver Help.

Memory Capacity and Paper Size

Additional memory apart from standard memory may be required depending on the paper size and data type.

❒ When printing from bypass tray, two-sided printing will not be supported regardless of the memory capacity, and only one-side will be printed.

One-sided printing (600 x 600 dpi)

128 MB (standard)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

256 MB (standard + 128 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

119

Other Print Operations

384 MB (standard + 256 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

One-sided printing (1200 x 600 dpi)

128 MB (standard)

• A6 and A5 sized paper printing is guaranteed.

• A4, B5 JIS, Letter and Legal sized paper can be printed.

256 MB (standard + 128 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

384 MB (standard + 256 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

One-sided printing (1200 x 1200 dpi)

128 MB (standard)

• Printing is not possible.

256 MB (standard + 128 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

384 MB (standard + 256 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

Two-sided printing (600 x 600 dpi)

128 MB (standard)

• A6 and A5 sized paper printing is guaranteed.

• A4, B5 JIS, Letter and Legal sized paper can be printed.

256 MB (standard + 128 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

384 MB (standard + 256 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

Two-sided printing (1200 x 600 dpi)

128 MB (standard)

• A6 sized paper printing is guaranteed.

• A6, A4, B5 JIS, Letter and Legal sized paper can be printed.

120

Other Print Operations

256 MB (standard + 128 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

384 MB (standard + 256 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

Two-sided printing (1200 x 1200 dpi)

128 MB (standard)

• Printing is not possible

256 MB (standard + 128 MB)

• A6, A5, and B5 JIS sized paper printing is guaranteed.

• A4, Letter and Legal sized paper can be printed.

384 MB (standard + 256 MB)

• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.

121

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Menu Chart

This section explains how to change the default settings of the printer and provides information about the parameters included in each menu.

Sample Print

❒ Appear only when the optional hard disk is installed.

❒ For details, see p.105 “Sample Print” .

Locked Print

❒ Appear only when the optional hard disk is installed.

❒ For Details, see p.109 “Locked Print” .

Paper Input

Menu

Bypass Size

Tray Paper Size

Paper Type

Tray Locking

Tray Priority

List/Test Print

Menu

Config.P/Er.Log

Config. Page

Error Log

Menu List

Color Demo Page

PCL Config.Page

PS Config. Page

PDF Config.Page

Hex Dump

Maintenance

Menu

Color Regist.

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

122

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Menu

Color Calibrate

Registration

Plain Paper

HD Format

4C.Graphic Mode

WL.LAN Signal

WL.LAN Defaults

Key Repeat

Menu Protect

List Print Lock

File Locking

Unlock Files

System

Menu

Prt. Err Report

Auto Continue

Memory Overflow

Copies

Printer Lang.

Sub Paper Size

Page Size

Def.Print Lang.

Duplex

Blank Pages

Energy Saver

Auto Reset Time

Unit of Measure

Spool Printing

Letterhead Mode

Bypass Priority

RAM Disk

Notify by Email

Email Date

123

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

[ Spool Printing ] appear when the optional hard disk is installed.

❒ [ RAM Disk ] will not appear when the optional hard disk is installed.

Host Interface

Menu

I/O Buffer

I/O Timeout

Network Setup

IEEE 1394 Setup

IEEE 802.11b

USB Setting

Bluetooth

❒ [ IEEE 1394 Setup ] appears when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.

❒ [ IEEE 802.11b Setup ] appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.

PCL Menu

Menu

Orientation

Form Lines

Font Source

Font Number

Point Size

Font Pitch

Symbol Set

Courier Font

Ext. A4 Width

Append CR to LF

Resolution

PS Menu

Menu

Data Format

Resolution

124

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Menu

Color Setting

Color Profile

PDF Menu

Menu

PDF: Change PW

PDF Group PW

Resolution

Color Setting

Color Profile

Language

Menu

English

German

French

Italian

Dutch

Swedish

Norwegian

Danish

Spanish

Finnish

Portuguese

Czech

Polish

Hungarian

125

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Paper Input Menu

This section explains about paper settings on the Paper Input menu such as paper sizes and types on each tray.

Changing the paper input menu

Tray locking

Follow the procedure below to lock/unlock trays.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Paper Input ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Tray Locking ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the tray to unlock, and then press the { # Enter } key.

E

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Off ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Paper Input ] screen appears.

F

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

Tray priority

Follow the procedure below to change the tray priority.

126

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Paper Input ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Tray Priority ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to select a tray you want to use.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Paper Input ] screen appears.

F

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

Paper input menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the Paper Input menu.

Bypass Size

You can specify the paper size for Bypass tray.

• 8

1

/

2

×

14, 8

1

/

2

×

11, 5

1

/

2

×

8

1

/

2

, 7

1

/

4

×

10

1

/

2

, 8

×

13, 8

1

/

2

×

13, 8

1

/

4

×

13,

A4 (210

×

297), B5 JIS(182

×

257), A5 (148

×

210), B6 JIS(128

×

182), A6

(105 × 148), 16K (195 × 267), 4

1

/

8

× 9

1

/

2

, 3

7

/

8

× 7

1

/

2

, C5 Env(162 × 229),

C6 Env(114 × 162), DL Env(110 × 220), Custom Size.

❒ Default:

• Metric version: A4 (210 × 297)

• Inch version: 8

1

/

2

×

11

JIS stands for “Japanese Industrial Standard”.

127

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Tray Paper Size

Paper size for tray 1

For details about the size of paper loaded in each tray, see "Paper and Other

Media Supported by This Printer", Maintenance Guide.

• Auto

• Custom Size

❒ Default: Auto

Paper Type

If you use various types of paper, select the paper type for tray 1 and tray 2.

For details about the type of paper loaded in each tray, see Maintenance

Guide.

Tray 1

Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead,

Preprinted, Thick Paper 1,Thick Paper 2, Labels, Bond Paper, Cardstock,

Transparency, Thin Paper, Plain:Dup.Back, Thick:Dup.Back.

Tray 2

Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead,

Preprinted, Labels

❒ Default : Plain Paper

Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.

Tray Locking

If you use various types of paper, you can lock a tray to prevent printing on different types of paper such as letterhead or colored paper. When [ Auto Select ] is selected in [ Paper Source ] from the printer driver, the locked tray is not used. You can select each tray set to on or off.

❒ Default : Off

When using custom size paper, if [ On ] is selected in [ Tray Locking ] , the size selected on the control panel has priority, if [ Off ] is selected, the size selected from the printer driver has priority.

❒ Only installed trays appear on the display panel.

❒ You can lock multiple trays.

If you need to have a tray locked, you must select the tray using both printer driver and control panel.

When a locked tray is selected from the printer driver, the printer does not search for another tray.

128

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Tray Priority

You can set a tray to be checked first when [ Auto Tray Select ] is selected in [ Paper Source ] from the printer driver. The tray selected here is used when no tray is selected for a print job.

Default : Tray 1

❒ Only installed trays appear on the display panel.

❒ It is recommended that you load paper of the size and orientation you use most frequently in the tray selected in [ Tray Priority ] .

129

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

List/Test Print Menu

You can print lists of configurations on printer or the paper printings.

Also, you can check the types and characters of all the printable fonts.

Printing a Configuration Page

Follow the procedure below to print the configuration page.

The configuration page is printed on A4 or Letter (8

1

/

2

x 11) size paper, size paper, so load them in the same paper tray.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ List/Test Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ Config. Page ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The configuration page is printed. The test print menu screen returns on completion of printing.

D

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

Interpreting the configuration page

System Reference

Printer ID

The serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer is displayed.

130

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Firmware Version

• Firmware

The version number of the printer controller firmware is displayed.

• Engine

The version number of the printer engine firmware is displayed.

• NCS

The version number of the network interface board is displayed.

Pages printed

The total number of pages printed by the printer to date is displayed.

Total Memory

The total amount of SDRAM installed on the printer is displayed.

Controller Option

The items are displayed when the controller options are installed.

Printer Language

The version number of the printer language is displayed.

Options

The options installed are displayed.

Consumption Status

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.

Paper input

Settings made on the [ Paper Input ] menu are displayed.

For details, see p.127 “Paper input menu parameters” .

Maintenance

Settings made on the [ Maintenance ] menu are displayed.

For details, see p.134 “Maintenance Menu” .

System

Settings made on the [ System ] menu are displayed.

For more information, see p.140 “System Menu” .

Host interface

Settings made on the [ Host Interface ] menu are displayed.

When DHCP is active on the network, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address appear in parentheses on the configuration page.

131

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

For details, see p.147 “Host Interface Menu” .

PCL Menu

Settings made on the [ PCL Menu ] are displayed.

For details, see p.154 “PCL Menu” .

PS menu

Settings made on the [ PS Menu ] are displayed.

For details, see p.157 “PS Menu” .

PDF menu

Settings made on the [ PDF Menu ] are displayed.

For details, see p.159 “PDF Menu” .

Interface information

Interface information is displayed.

List/Test menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the List/Test menu.

Config.P/Er.Log

You can print the configuration page and error log.

Config. Page

You can print the current configuration of the printer.

Error Log

You can print an error report.

Error Log

You can print a menu list showing all available menus.

Color Demo Page

You can print a Color Demo Page.

PCL Config.Page

You can print the current PCL configuration.

PS Config. Page

You can print an installed PS font and the Disk Directory List which shows the optional hard disk.

132

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

PDF Config.Page

You can print an installed PS3 font and the Disk Directory List which shows the optional hard disk.

Hex Dump

You can print the data sent by the computer using Hex Dump.

133

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Maintenance Menu

You can set printing conditions such as density and calibration, and printer management such as formatting the optional hard disk unit.

Changing the maintenance menu

This section explains changing the maintenance menu using examples.

HD Format

Follow the procedure below to format the optional hard disk unit after initial setup.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ Maintenance ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ HD Format ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Read the HD format confirmation message, and then press the { # Enter } key to start formatting.

The optional hard disk unit is formatted, and the rebooting message appears.

E

Turn off the printer's power. After a few seconds, turn the power on again.

The optional hard disk unit is now formatted and ready to use.s

134

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

If the [ HD Format ] button is not displayed, the optional hard disk unit is not properly installed. Reinstall the optional hard disk unit. For details about the optional hard disk unit, see Setup Guide. If you cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative.

Displaying the signal strength

Follow the procedure below to check the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) signal on the [ Maintenance ] menu.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ Maintenance ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ WL.LAN Signal: ], and then press the

{ # Enter } key.

Check the display for result.

D

Press the { Escape } key.

The initial screen appears.

If [ WL.LAN Signal: ] is not displayed, [ IEEE802.11b

] has not been selected for

[ LAN Type ] in [ Network Setup ] on the [ Host Interface ] menu. Select

[ IEEE802.11b

] for [ LAN Type ] , and then check that [ WL.LAN Signal ] is displayed on the [ Maintenance ] menu again.

❒ Signal status can be measured in [ Infrastructure ] under [ Comm. Mode ] of the wireless LAN. If [ Ad hoc ] or [ 802.11Ad hoc ] is selected in [ Comm. Mode ] , signal status cannot be measured. To measure signal status, select [ Comm. Mode ] in [ Infrastructure ] under [ IEEE802.11b

] on the [ Host Interface ] menu.

Every time you press the { # Enter } key, the signal is updated.

135

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

❒ The signal is rated [ Good ] if signal strength is 86%-100%, [ Fair ] if 61%-85%,

[ Poor ] if 31%-60%, and [ Unavailable ] if 0%-30%. If the signal is unstable or unavailable, remove any obstructions or move the printer to a place to receive the signal.

❒ Using wireless devices or microwave sources nearby will affect the signal transmission.

Resetting the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Settings

Follow the procedure below to reset the wireless LAN setting on the [ Maintenance ] menu.

❒ [ Comm. Mode ] , [ Channel ] , [ Trans. Speed ] , [ WEP Setting ] , and [ SSID ] can be selected on the [ Host Interface ] menu.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ Maintenance ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ WL.LAN Defaults ], and then press the

{ # Enter } key.

D

Press the { # Enter } key.

The wireless LAN setting is reset.

After about three seconds, the initial screen appears.

Maintenance menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the Maintenance menu.

Color Regist.

You can specify Auto Adjust or Fuser Adjust for this feature.

136

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Color Calibrate

You can adjust the gradation of bright (highlighted parts) and medium areas

(middle parts) for printing.

Start Calibr. 1

You can print gradation correction sheet 1.

Start Calibr. 2

You can print gradation correction sheet 2.

Start Calibr. 2

You can reset the gradation correction value to default.

For details, see "Correcting the Color Gradation", Maintenance Guide .

Registration

You can adjust the starting position of the printing page.

Prt. Test Sheet

You can print the registration test sheet.

• Tray 1

• Tray 2

• Tray 3

• Bypass Tray

• Duplex.BackSide

❒ Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.

Adjustment

You can select the start position for printing on a page.

• Horiz: Tray 1

• Horiz: Tray 2

• Horiz: Tray 3

• Horiz: Bypass

• Horiz:Dup.Back

• Vert:All Trays

• Vert:Dup.Back

Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.

Plain Paper

You can specify plain paper for each tray.

137

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

• Tray 1

• Tray 2

• Tray 3

• Bypass Tray

Default: Plain paper 1

HD Format

You can format the hard disk when the optional hard disk is installed.

For details about formatting the hard disk, see "Attaching the Hard Disk

Drive Type 4000", Setup Guide .

4C.Graphic Mode

This mode adjusts levels of toner color overlap. If characters or lines blur, selecting [ Text Priority ] may make them clearer. Select [ Photo Priority ] for normal use.

❒ Default: Photo Priority

WL.LAN Signal

You can check the signal strength when using wireless LAN.

For details about displaying the signal strength, see p.135 “Displaying the signal strength” .

WL.LAN Defaults

Reset the wireless LAN to default. The menu appears when the 802.11b interface unit is installed.

Key Repeat

Holding down [ On ] allows users to scroll through items and settings. Pressing

[ Off ] moves through items and settings one at a time.

❒ Default: On

Menu Protect

This procedure protects menu settings from accidental changes. A key operation is required to change menu settings. In a network environment, only network administrators can change menu settings.

• Level 1

• Level 2

• Off

138

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Default: OffOff

❒ While the printer is online, press the { # Enter } key, press the { Escape } key, and then press the { Menu } key. You can access [ Menu Protect ] on the display panel.

You can preserve settings for the [ Maintenance ] , [ System ] , [ Host Interface ] , and [ Language ] menus on Level 1.

You can preserve settings for the [ Paper Input ] , [ Maintenance ] , [ System ] , [ Host

Interface ] , and [ Language ] menus on LLevel 2.

List Print Lock

Disable users to print the lists or reports in List/Test Menu or other test prints.

• On

• Off

❒ Default: Off

While the printer is online, press the { # Enter } key, then press the { Escape } key, and then press the { Menu } key. You can access [ List Print

Lock ] from the display panel.

File Locking

If the user tries to access a file and enters the wrong password 10 times, the file is automatically locked.

• On

• Off

❒ Default: Off.

❒ While the printer is online, press the { # Enter } key, then press the { Escape } key, and then press the { Menu } key. You can access [ File Locking ] from the display panel.

Unlock Files

You can unlock a file that was locked because a user entered the wrong password 10 times.

❒ While the printer is online, press the { # Enter } key, then press the { Escape } key, and then press the { Menu } key. You can access [ Unlock Files ] from the display panel.

139

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

System Menu

You can set basic functions required to use the printer. The printer can be used on factory default, but the configuration can be changed depending on the condition of the user. The changed condition holds even if the printer is turned off.

Changing the system menu

Follow the procedure below to change the settings for E. Saver Timer.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press {U} or {T} key to display [ System ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press {U} or {T} key to display [ Energy Saver ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ E. Saver Timer ], and then enter { # Enter } Key

E

Press {U} or {T} key to select the lead time needed to switch to the Energy Saver mode.

F

Press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Energy Saver ] screen appears.

G

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

System menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the System menu.

140

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Prt. Err Report

You can select [ On ] or [ Off ] to have an error report printed when a printer error or memory error occurs.

• Off

• On

❒ Default: Off

Auto Continue

You can make the Auto Continue setting. When set to on, printing continues after a system error occurs.

• Off

• Immediate

• 1 minute

• 5 minutes

• 10 minutes

• 15 minutes

Default: Off

❒ When set to on and certain errors occur, the current job may be canceled, and the printer automatically perform the next queued job.

Copies

You can specify whether or not to print a memory overflow error report.

• Do not Print

• Error Info.

Default: Do not Print

Copies

You can specify the number of pages to print.

This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print is specified by command or the printer driver.

• 1-999

Printer Lang.

You can specify the printer language.

• Auto Detect

• PCL

• PS

• PDF

141

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Default: Auto Detect

Sub Paper Size

You can select [ Off ] or [ Auto ] to enable the Sub Paper Size function. When you select [ Auto ] , the printer uses an alternative paper size if the currently specified paper is not loaded. When you select [ Off ] , the printer uses any size paper in the current specified paper tray.

• Off

• Auto

❒ Default: Off

Page Size

You can specify the default paper size.

8

1

/

2

× 14, 8

1

/

2

× 11, 5

1

/

2

× 8

1

(105

×

148), 16K (195

×

267), 4

/

2

, 7

1

/

8

×

1

/

9

4

1

× 10

/

2

, 3

7

/

1

8

/

2

, 8 × 13, 8

×

7

Env(114

×

162), DL Env(110

×

220), Custom Size.

1

1

/

2

× 13, 8

1

/

4

× 13,

A4 (210 × 297), B5 JIS(182 × 257), A5 (148 × 210), B6 JIS(128 × 182), A6

/

2

, C5 Env(162

×

229), C6

Default:

• Metric version: A4

• Inch version: 8 1 /

2

× 11

❒ The initial paper size is applied when the paper size is not specified in the print data.

Def.Print Lang.

You can specify the initial printer language if the machine cannot detect the printer language.

• PCL

• PS

• PDF

❒ Default: PCL

Duplex

You can specify whether or not to print on both sides of a sheet.

• Off

• Short Edge Bind

• Long Edge Bind

142

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Default: Off

❒ This menu appears only when the optional duplex unit is installed.

Blank Pages

You can specify whether or not to print blank pages.

• Do not print

• Print

❒ Default: Do not print

Energy Saver

You can specify how many minutes for the energy saver mode.

E. Saver on/off

You can specify whether or not to switch E. Saver.

• On

• Off

Default: On

When the printer switches to the Energy Saver mode, the Power indicator goes off, while the online indicator stays lit.

E. Saver Timer

You can select the lead time needed to switch to the Energy Saver mode.

The Energy Saver mode reduces electric power consumption.

• 5 minutes

• 15 minutes

• 30 minutes

• 45 minutes

• 60 minutes

Default: 30 minutes

❒ When the printer switches to the Energy Saver mode, the Power indicator goes off, while the On Line indicator stays lit and [ Energy Save Mode ] appears.

Auto Reset Time

You can set On or Off and the time for the Auto Reset Timer.

Auto Reset

• On

143

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

• Off

❒ Default: On

Set Time

• 10 to 999sec by 1sec.

Unit of Measure

You can specify the unit of measurement in “mm” or “inch” for the custom paper size.

• mm

• inch

Default value is destination dependant.

Spool Printing

You can select whether all of the print data is spooled to the hard disk drive before printing.

• Off

• On

Default: Off

Spooling stores a sent print job temporarily in the printer, and then prints it.

❒ This menu appears only when the optional hard disk is installed.

Letterhead Mode

You can select the letterhead printing mode.

• Off

• Auto Detect

• On (Always)

❒ Default: Off

Bypass Priority

When the different paper size or type is specified from the driver, you can specify which setting is given priority to, machine setting or command.

• Machine

• Driver/Command

Default: Driver/Command

144

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

RAM Disk

If the optional hard disk is not installed for PDF Direct Print, select a value of

2 MB or higher.

This menu appears only when the optional hard disk is not installed.

• 0 MB

• 2 MB

• 4 MB

• 8 MB

• 16 MB

Default: 4 MB

When the amount of SDRAM is small and RAM Disk is set to 16 MB, printing may not be possible depending on the print job and duplex printing may be canceled. If this happens, increase the amount of SDRAM, or set RAM

Disk to 8 MB or less.

For details about the optional SDRAM module, see Setup Guide.

Notify by Email

You can specify whether or not to send an error message to a preset e-mail address when an error occurs in the printer.

• Off

• On

After changing the setting, turn off the power of the printer briefly, and then turn it on again.

Default: On

For information, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Email Date

When a mail date/time cannot be notified, the user can set whether a dummy date/time is set or not.

• Off

• On

❒ default: Off

145

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

❒ While the printer is online, press the { # Enter } key, then press the { Escape } key, and then press the { Menu } key. You can access [ Email Date ] from the display panel.

146

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Host Interface Menu

You can set configurations about network connections and communication when using parallel connection between the printer and the computer. The changed configuration holds even if the printer is turned off.

Changing the Host Interface menu

Follow the procedure below to change the I/O Timeout

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Host Interface ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ I/O Timeout ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to select the lead time needed to end a printing operation, and then press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Host Interface ] menu appears.

E

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

Host Interface menu parameters

This section explains parameters that can be set on the Host Interface menu.

I/O Buffer

You can select the size of I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting.

• 128 KB

147

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

• 256 KB

• 512 KB

❒ Default: 128 KB

I/O Timeout

You can set how many seconds the printer should wait before ending a print job. If printing operation is frequently interrupted by data from other ports, you can increase the timeout period.

• 10 seconds

• 15 seconds

• 20 seconds

• 25 seconds

• 60 seconds

❒ Default: 15 seconds

Network Setup

You can make network-related settings.

For details, see “Configuration”, Setup Guide.

DHCP

You can select [ On ] or [ Off ] to use DHCP with TCP/IP.

• On

• Off

❒ Default: On

IP Address

You can specify the IP address.

❒ When DHCP is set to on, the IP address cannot be changed. To change it, set DHCP to off. Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.

❒ Default: 011.022.033.044

Subnet Mask

You can specify the subnet mask.

148

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

When DHCP is set to on, the subnet mask cannot be changed. To change it, set DHCP to off. Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.

❒ Default: 000.000.000.000

Gateway Address

You can specify the gateway address.

❒ When DHCP is set to on, the gateway address cannot be changed. To change it, set DHCP to off. Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.

Default: 000.000.000.000

Frame Type (NW)

You can select the frame type for NetWare.

• Auto Select

• Ethernet ll

• Ethernet 802.2

• Ethernet 802.3

• Ethernet SNAP

❒ Default: Auto Select

Active Protocol

You can select the active protocol.

• TCP/IP

• NetWare

• SMB

• AppleTalk

Default: All Active

Ethernet Speed

You can select the network speed to operate the printer.

• Auto Select

• 10Mbps Half D.

• 10Mbps Full D.

149

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

• 100Mbps Half D.

• 100Mbps Full D.

❒ Default: Auto Select

LAN Type

You can select Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b for LAN Type.

This menu appears only when the optional 802.11 interface unit is installed.

• Ethernet

• IEEE 802.11b

Default: Ethernet

IEEE 1394 Setup

You can make settings for IEEE 1394. This menu appears only when the optional IEEE 1394 board is installed.

For details about IEEE 1394 Setup, see Setup Guide.

DHCP

You can select [ on ] or [ Off ] to use TCP/IP with DHCP.

• On

• Off

❒ Default: On

IP Address1394

You can specify the IP address for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).

Default: 0.0.0.0

When using both Ethernet and IP over 1394 simultaneously, do not specify the IP address used for Ethernet.

Subnet Mask1394

You can specify the subnet mask for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).

❒ Default: 0.0.0.0

❒ When using both Ethernet and IP over 1394 simultaneously, do not specify the subnet mask used for Ethernet.

150

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

IP over 1394

You can specify whether or not to activate IP over 1394.

• Active

• Not Active

Default: Active

SCSI print

You can specify whether or not to activate SCSI print.

• Active

• Not Active

Default: Active

Bidi-SCSI print

You can specify whether or not to activate bidirectional communication for

SCSI print.

• Active

• Not Active

❒ Default: Not Active

IEEE 802.11b

You can make settings for wireless LAN. This menu appears only when the optional 802.11b interface unit is installed.

Comm. Mode

You can select the transmission mode for IEEE 802.11b.

• 802.11 Ad hoc

• Infrastructure

• Ad hoc

Default: 802.11 Ad hoc

❒ Comm. Mode can also be set using a Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Channel

You can select channels: 1-13 (metric version)/1-11 (inch version).

❒ Default: 11

151

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Trans. Speed

You can select the transmission speed for IEEE 802.11b.

• Auto

• 11 Mbps

• 5.5 Mbps

• 2 Mbps

• 1 Mbps

❒ Default: Auto

SSID

You can set an SSID in the infrastructure mode and the 802.11 Ad hoc mode.

Select [ View ] to check the SSID. Select [ Enter ID ] to set SSID.

• View

• Enter ID

Select [ ?

] to enter [ / ] for the SSID. Also, [ ¥ ] appears when printing the configuration page, read it as [ / ] .

Default: blank (ASSID)

Characters used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).

❒ An SSID is set automatically to the nearest access point if no SSID has been set.

If no SSID has been set for the 802.11 ad hoc mode, an SSID is set automatically and the same SSID is used for the 802.11 ad hoc mode and the infrastructure mode.

❒ If blank is specified in SSID for 802.11b adhoc mode or adhoc mode,

“ASSID” appears.

❒ An SSID can also be set using Web Image Monitor. For details, see

Web Image Monitor Help.

WEP Setting

You can specify whether or not to activate WEP settings.

• Active

• Not Active

❒ Default: Not Active

❒ The WEP key can be entered using a hexadecimal number or an ASCII character sequence.

152

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

❒ When using 64 bit WEP, up to 10 hexadecimal or 5 ASCII characters can be entered. When using 128 bit WEP, up to 26 hexadecimal or 13

ASCII characters can be entered.

The WEP key can also be set using Web Image Monitor. For details, see

Web Image Monitor Help.

USB Setting

You can select the transmission speed for USB.

• Full Speed

• Auto

❒ Default: Auto

While the printer is online, press the { # Enter } key, then press the { Escape } key, and then press the { Menu } key. You can access [ USB Setting ] from the display panel.

Bluetooth

This is a standard wireless LAN technology utilizing 2.4Ghz bandwidth. The device can be recognized by computers that have Bluetooth Technology installed when switched to [ Public ] .

• Public

• Private

Default: Public

While the printer is online, press the { # Enter } key, then press the { Escape } key, and then press the { Menu } key. You can access [ Bluetooth ] from the display panel.

153

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

PCL Menu

You can set conditions when using PCL for printing.

Changing the PCL menu

Follow the procedure below to change the setting for Orientation.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ PCL Menu ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Orientation ] screen, and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to select the orientation, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ PCL Menu ] screen appears.

E

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

PCL menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the PCL menu.

Orientation

You can select the page orientation.

• Portrait

• Landscape

154

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Default: Portrait

Form Lines

You can specify the number of lines per page between 5 and 128.

❒ Default:

• Metric version: 60

• Inch version: 64

Font Source

You can set the location of the default font.

• Resident

• RAM

• HDD

• SD

❒ Default: Resident

❒ When you select [ RAM ] , you can select only fonts downloaded to the printer

RAM.

❒ When you select [ HDD ] , you can select only fonts downloaded to the optional hard disk.

Font Number

You can specify the ID of the default font you want to use.

• 0 to 50(Internal)

• 1 to 50(Download)

Point Size

You can specify the point size you want to use for the default font between 4 and 999.75 in 0.25 increments.

❒ Default: 12.00 points

This setting is effective only for a variable-space font.

Font Pitch

You can specify the number of characters per inch you want to use for the default font between 0.44 and 99.99 in 0.01 increments.

❒ Default: 10.00 pitch

❒ This setting is effective only for fixed-space fonts.

155

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Symbol Set

You can specify the character set for the default font. Available sets are as follows:

Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-

TK, Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ,

Math-8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO

17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0

❒ Default: PC-8

Courier Font

You can select a courier-type font.

• Regular

• Dark

Default: Regular

Ext. A4 Width

You can extend the width of the printable area of A4 sheets reducing side margin width.

• Off

• On

Default: Off

Append CR to LF

You can specify whether or not to append a CR code to each LF code to print text data clearly.

• Off

• On

❒ Default: Off

Resolution

You can specify the print resolution in dots per inch.

• 300 dpi

• 600 dpi

❒ Default: 600 dpi

156

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

PS Menu

You can set conditions when using Postscript for printing.

Changing the PS menu

Follow the procedure below to change the setting for data format.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ PS Menu ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Data Format ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to select [ TBCP ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ PS Menu ] screen appears.

E

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

PS menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the Postscript menu.

Data Format

You can select the data format.

• Binary Data

• TBCP

This setting is effective when using a parallel, USB, or EtherTalk connection.

157

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

When you use a parallel or USB connection, the print job is canceled if binary data is sent from the printer driver.

When you use an Ethernet connection, the print job is canceled if:

• The printer driver data format is TBCP and the data format selected using the control panel is Binary Data.

• The printer driver data format is binary and the data format selected using the control panel is TBCP.

❒ Default: Binary Data

Resolution

You can select the resolution.

• 600dpi Fast

• 600dpi Std.

• 1200dpi

Default: 600dpi Fast

Color Setting

You can make an RGB setting.

• None

• Fine

• Super Fine

Default: Super Fine

Color Profile

You can select the color profile.

• Auto

• Solid Color

• Presentation

• Photographic

• User Setting

❒ Default: Auto

158

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

PDF Menu

You can set conditions when using PDF printing.

Changing the PDF menu

Follow the procedure below to change the resolution setting.

A

Press { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press {U} or {T} key to display [ PDF Menu ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press {U} or {T} key to display [ Resolution ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press {U} or {T} key to select the resolution, and then press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ PDF Menu ] screen appears.

E

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

PDF menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the PDF menu.

PDF: Change PW

You can specify the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.

• Current PW

159

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

The password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but must be sent through the network. For increased security, use this menu on the control panel to set the password directly.

❒ Default: no password set

PDF Group PW

You can set a group password specified using DeskTopBinder Lite.

❒ When you use a group password, the optional data protection unit must be installed.

• Current PW

❒ The password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but must be sent through the network. For increased security, use this menu on the control panel to set the password directly.

Default: no password set

Resolution

You can select the resolution for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.

• 600dpi Fast

• 600dpi Std.

• 1200dpi

Default: 600dpi Fast

Color Setting

You can make an RGB setting for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.

• None

• Fine

• Super Fine

❒ Default: Super Fine

Color Profile

You can select the color profile for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.

• Auto

• Solid Color

160

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

• Presentation

• Photographic

• User Setting

❒ Default: Auto

161

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Language Menu

You can set language displayed on the menu.

Changing the language menu

Follow the procedure below to change the language.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Language ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to select the language, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Menu ] screen appears.

D

Press the { On Line } key.

The initial screen appears.

Language menu parameters

You can select the language you use. Available languages are as follows:

English, German, French, Italian, Danish, Spanish, Finnish, Portuguese, Czech,

Polish, and Hungarian.

❒ Default: English

162

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using Web Image Monitor

Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the printer status and change settings.

Available operations

The following operations can be remotely performed using Web Image Monitor from a client computer.

• Displaying printer status or settings

• Checking the print job status or history

• Interrupting currently printing jobs

• Resetting the printer

• Managing the Address Book

• Making printer settings

• Making e-mail notification settings

• Making network protocol settings

• Making security settings

Configuring the printer

To perform the operations from Web Image Monitor, TCP/IP is required. After the printer is configured to use TCP/IP, operations from Web Image Monitor become available.

Recommended Web browser

• Windows:

Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher

Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher

• Mac OS 8.1 or higher:

Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher

Safari 1.0 or higher

To use Netscape Navigator with Secured Sockets Layer (SSL: an encryption protocol), use Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher.

If the previous versions of the Web browser above are used or JavaScript and cookies are not enabled with the Web browser used, display and operation problems may occur.

If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Contact your network administrator for information about the settings.

❒ The previous page may not appear even after the back button of a Web browser is clicked. If this happens, click the refresh button of a Web browser.

❒ Updating the printer information is not automatically performed. Click [ Refresh ] in the display area to update the printer information.

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

163

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Displaying Top Page

This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.

A

Start your Web browser.

B

Enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar of a Web browser.

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

❒ If the printer's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server, you can enter it. For details, see p.282 “Using DHCP” .

❒ When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentification is issued , enter "https://(printer's address)/".

Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:

1.

Header area

The link to help and dialog box for keyword search appears.

2.

Menu area

The dialog box for switching to the user mode and administrator mode appears, and each mode's menu will be displayed.

If you select menu, it's content will be shown on the work area, or the sub area.

3.

Display area

Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.

Printer information in the display area is not automatically updated. Click [ Refresh ] at the upper right in the display area to update the printer information. Click the Web browser's [ Refresh ] button to refresh the entire browser screen.

Printer status, network interface board names, and comments are displayed.

4.

Help

Use Help to view or download Help file contents.

164

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

About Menu and Mode

There are two modes available with Web Image Monitor: user mode and administrator mode.

Displayed Items may differ depending on the printers.

About User Mode

In the user mode, printer status, settings, and print job status can be viewed, but the printer settings cannot be changed.

1.

Status

Printer status, including the amount of remaining paper in paper trays and the amount of remaining toner, is displayed.

2.

Job

Allows you to display list of Spooled Print Job, Job History, Error Log, Locked Print, and Sample Print Jobs. This also perform or delete Locked Print and Sample Print

Job.

3.

Configuration

Display current printer and network settings, and download help files.

Administrator Mode

In the administrator mode, you can configure various printer settings.

1.

Status

Printer status, including the amount of remaining paper in paper trays and the amount of remaining toner, is displayed.

165

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

2.

Job

Allows you to display list of Spooled Print Job, Job History, Error Log, Sample Print and Locked Print. This also allows you to delete Spooled Print Job, Sample Print and

Sample Print jobs.

3.

Address Book

User information can be registered, displayed, changed, and deleted.

4.

Configuration

Make system settings for the printer, interface settings, and security.

5.

Reset Printer Job

Click to reset current print jobs and print jobs in queue. This button is located on Top

Page.

6.

Reset Device

Click to reset the printer. If a print job is being processed, the printer will be reset after the print job is completed. This button is located on Top Page.

Access in the Administrator Mode

Follow the procedure below to access Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.

A

On Top Page, click [ Login ].

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

B

Enter your user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

To use the default account, enter "admin" as user name, and leave the password blank.

Displaying Web Image Monitor Help

When using Help for the first time, clicking either [ Help ] in the header area or the icon marked "?" in the display area makes the following screen appear, in which you can view Help in two different ways, as shown below:

Viewing Help on our Web site

Downloading Help to your computer

Downloading and Checking Help

You can download Help to your computer. As the Help URL, you can specify the path to the local file to view the Help without connecting to the Internet.

❒ By clicking [ Help ] in the header area, the contents of Help appear.

166

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

❒ By clicking "?", the Help icon in the display area, Help for the setting items in the display area appears.

Downloading Help

A

In the [ OS ] list, select the operating system.

B

In the [ Language ] list, select the language.

C

Click [ Download ].

D

Download Help by following the instructions on the screen.

E

Store the downloaded compressed file in a location, and then decompress the file.

To view the downloaded Web Image Monitor Help, set the path to the location of the decompressed file.

Linking the URL of the Help File to the

[

Help

]

Button.

You can link the URL of the help file on a computer or Web server to the [ Help ] button.

A

Log on to Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.

B

In the menu area, click [ Configuration ].

C

Click [ Webpage ].

D

In the [ Help URL ] box, enter the URL of the help file.

If you saved the help file to "C:HELPEN", enter "file://C:/HELP/". For example, if you saved the file to a Web server, and the URL of the index file is "http:// a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html", enter "http://a.b.c.d/HELP/".

E

Click [ Apply ].

167

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can monitor the network printers. Also, you can change the configuration of the network interface board using

TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.

Protocol stack provided with Operating System

• Windows 95/98/Me

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

NetWare

NetWare Client32 for Windows 95

IntraNetWare Client for Windows 95

Novell Client for Windows 95/98/Me

• Windows 2000

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

NetWare

Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP

• Windows Server 2003

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

• Windows XP

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP

• Windows NT 4.0

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

Client Service for NetWare

NetWare Client32 for Windows NT

IntraNetWare Client for Windows NT

Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP

Available operations

The following functions are available:

• Printer Information function

• Display the network settings and detailed information of the printer.

• Display the number of pages printed under each User Code.

• Display the status of print jobs sent form computers.

• Change the printer network settings.

• Device Settings function

168

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• Lock some of the setting items on the control panel so that they cannot be changed using the control panel.

• Select type of paper loaded in the paper trays.

• Energy Saver function

• Enable or disable the Energy Saver mode.

• System Status function

• Display the information such as when paper is depleted during printing on a computer .

• Groups function

• Monitor multiple printers at the same time. When there are multiple printers to manage, you can create groups and classify the printers to facilitate management.

• You can customize printer status according to groups, and send status notification e-mail to a computer.

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Follow the procedure below to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

❒ Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case, launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client / Admin ] installation, and then click [ Next ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading through its contents, click [ I accept the agreement ] if you agree, and then click [ Next > ] .

F

Follow the instructions on the screen.

A message appears when the installation is complete.

G

Click [ OK ].

169

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

If you are required to restart the computer after installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, restart the computer and continue the configuration.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client supports following languages: Czech, Danish, German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese , Finnish, Swedish, Chinese Simple and Chinese

Traditional.

Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration

Follow the procedure below to change the network interface board configuration using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ]. A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ NIB Setup Tool ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the user name and password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

To use the default account, enter "admin" as the user name, and leave the password blank.

NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the instruction on the screen.

E

Enter required setting items.

Configure settings using Web Image Monitor. For details, see p.163 “Using

Web Image Monitor” .

F

Quit Web Image Monitor.

G

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel

Follow the procedure below to lock the menus on the printer's control panel.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

170

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

❒ Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

Select a printer.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, point to [ Device Settings ], and then click [ Protect Printer

Operation Panel ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the

Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

To use the default account, enter "admin" as the user name, and leave the password blank.

The [ System ] page of Web Image Monitor appears.

F

Select [ Level 1 ] or [ Level 2 ] in the [ Lock Operation Panel Menu ] list.

G

Click [ Apply ].

H

Quit Web Image Monitor.

For details about setting items, see Help in the [ General Settings ] on [ Configuration ] page.

Changing the Paper Type

Follow the procedure below to change the paper type.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, point to [ Device Settings ], and then click [ Select Paper

Type ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the

Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

171

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

To use the default account, enter “admin” as the user name, and leave the password blank.

The [ Paper ] page appears.

F

Select a paper type in the [ Paper Type ] list for each tray.

G

Click [ Apply ].

H

Quit Web Image Monitor.

For details about setting items, see Help in the [ General Settings ] on [ Configuration ] page.

Managing User Information

Follow the procedure below to manage the user's information using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

Prints jobs can be managed and functions restricted by User Code.

Starting User Management Tool

Follow the procedure below to start User Management Tool.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

In the list, select a printer you want to manage.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ User Management Tool ].

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

The default user name is “admin”, and default password is left blank.

User Management Tool starts.

For details about User Management Tool, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

172

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Displaying the Number of Sheets Printed

Follow the procedure below to display the number of sheets printed under each

User Code.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

Click the [ User Page Count ] tab of User Management Tool.

The number of pages printed under each User Code appears.

C

Click [ Finish ] on the [ File ] menu to quit User Management Tool.

Exporting the information about the number of pages printed

Follow the procedure below to export the information of the number of pages printed under each User Code as a .csv file.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

Click the [ User Page Count ] tab of User Management Tool.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Export User Statics List ].

D

Specify the save location and file name, and then click [ Save ].

E

Click [ Finish ] on the [ File ] menu to quit User Management Tool.

Resetting the number of pages printed to 0.

Follow the procedure below to reset the number of pages printed under each

User Code to 0.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin .

B

Click the [ User Page Count ] tab of User Management Tool.

C

Click the user whose information you want to reset.

D

On the [ Edit ] menu, click [ Reset User Counters ].

E

Select the check box of the items you want to reset, and then click [ OK ].

A confirmation message appears.

F

Click [ Yes ].

The number of pages printed is reset to 0.

G

On the [ Edit ] menu, click [ Apply Settings ].

Changes are applied to information on the [ User Page Count ] tab.

H

Click [ Finish ] on the [ File ] menu to quit User Management Tool.

173

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Restricting Functions

Follow the procedure below to restrict use of individual functions.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Edit ] menu of User Management Tool, click [ Restrict Access To Device ].

C

Select the check box of the functions you want to restrict.

D

Click [ OK ].

A confirmation message appears.

E

Click [ Yes ].

The settings are applied.

Setting Applicable Functions to New Users

Follow the procedure below to add new users and set functions applicable to them.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

Click the [ Access Control List ] tab of User Management Tool.

C

On the [ Edit ] menu, click [ Add New User ].

D

Enter the User Code and user name.

E

Select the check box of the functions applicable to the new user.

❒ If the check boxes are unavailable, there is no restriction to use that function. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

F

Click [ OK ].

The new user is added.

G

On the [ Edit ] menu, click [ Apply Settings ].

The settings are applied.

H

Click [ Finish ] on the [ File ] menu to quit User Management Tool.

For details about setting restrictions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Help.

174

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Configuring the Energy Saver Mode

Follow the procedure below to configure Energy Saver mode.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

❒ Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

Select the printer whose settings you want to make.

To make settings for all printers in the selected group, select no printer.

D

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Energy Save Mode ], point to [ Set Individually ] to make the settings for only the selected printer or point to [ Set By Group ] to make the settings for all printers in the selected group, and then click

[ On ] or [ Off ].

E

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

For details about the setting value for Energy Saver mode, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

Setting a Password

Follow the procedure below to set a password.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

C

In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ NIB Setup Tool ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the

Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the instruction on the screen.

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

175

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

To use the default account, enter "admin" as the user name, and leave the password blank.

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

F

Click [ Configuration ].

G

Click [ Device Settings ].

H

Click [ Program/Change Administrator ].

I

Click [ Change ].

J

On the [ New Password ], enter a password.

Enter the same password in [ Confirm Password ] .

K

Click [ OK ].

L

Quit Web Image Monitor.

M

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

Checking the Printer Status

Follow the procedure below to check printer status.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

The status of printers is indicated by icons in the list.

For details about status icons, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

C

To obtain status details, click the printer in the list, and then click [ Open ] on the [ Device ] menu.

The printer status appears in the dialog box.

D

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

Changing Names and Comments

Follow the procedure below to change the names and comments of the printer.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

176

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ]. A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

Select a printer in the list.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ NIB Setup Tool ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the

Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the instruction on the screen.

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

To use the default account, enter “admin” as the user name, and leave the password blank.

F

Click [ Configuration ].

G

Click [ Device Settings ].

H

On the [ System ] page, enter the device name in the [ Device Name: ] box and a comment in the [ Comment ] box, and click [ Apply ].

• In the [ Device Name: ] box, enter a device name on the printer using up to 31 characters.

• In the [ Comment ] box, enter a comment on the printer using up to 31 characters.

I

Click [ OK ].

J

Quit Web Image Monitor.

K

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

177

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

To view the status of printers using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, configure

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client beforehand.

Monitoring Printers

Follow the procedure below to monitor the printer using SmartDeviceMonitor for

Client.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon appears in the task tray.

B

Right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, and check that the printer appears on the pop-up menu.

C

Click [ Options...

] on the pop-up menu if the printer does not appear on the pop-up menu.

The [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client - Options ] dialog box appears.

D

Click the printer you want to monitor, and then select the [ To Be Monitored ] check box in the [ Monitoring Information Settings ] area.

❒ To display the printer status in the task tray using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, select the [ Displayed on Task Bar ] check box.

❒ For details about status icons, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

E

Click [ OK ].

The dialog box closes and the configured printer is monitored.

Checking the Printer Status

Follow the procedure below to check printer status using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

B

For status details, right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, and then click the printer.

The printer status appears in the dialog box.

❒ For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

178

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

When using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, note the following:

• The network printer can only receive one print job from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client at a time. While the network printer is printing, another user cannot access it until the job is finished. In this case, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client tries to access the network printer until the retry interval expires.

• If SmartDeviceMonitor for Client cannot access the network printer and times out, it will stop sending the print job. In this case, you should cancel the paused status from the print queue window. SmartDeviceMonitor for Client will resume access to the network printer. You can delete the print job from the print queue window, but canceling a print job printed by the network printer might cause the next job sent from another user to be incorrectly printed.

• If a print job sent from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is interrupted and the network printer cancels the job because something went wrong, send the print job again.

• Print jobs sent from another computer do not appear in the print queue window, regardless of protocol.

• If various users send print jobs using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client to network printers, the printing order might not be the same as that in which the jobs were sent.

• An IP address cannot be used for the IPP port name because the IP address is used for the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port name.

• When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentification is issued, enter "https://(printer's address)/". Internet Explorer must be installed on your computer. Use the highest version. Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is recommended.

• If the [ Security Alert ] dialog box appears when accessing the printer using IPP to create or configure an IPP port, or when printing, install the certificate. To select the certificate store location when using Certificate Import Wizard, click

[ Place all certificates in the following store ] , and then click [ Local Computer ] under

[ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ] .

179

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Printer Status Notification by E-Mail

Whenever a paper tray becomes empty or paper is jammed, an e-mail alert is issued to the registered addresses to notify the printer status.

For this notification, you can make the e-mail notification settings.

Notification timing and e-mail content can be set.

A

Set [ Notify by Email ] under the [ System ] menu to [ On ] using the control panel. .

The default is [ On ] .

For details, see p.140 “System Menu”

B

Open a Web browser, and then enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar.

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentification is issued , enter "https://(printer's address)/".

C

Click [ Login ] on Top Page of Web Image Monitor.

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

D

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

To use the default account, enter "admin" as user name, and leave the password blank.

E

In the menu area, click [ Configuration ].

F

Click [ Device Settings ], and then click [ E-mail ].

G

Make the following settings:

• Items in the Reception column

• Items in the SMTP column

• Items in the POP before SMTP column

• Items in the POP3/IMAP4 column

• Items in the E-mail Reception Port column

• Items in the E-mail Notification column

H

Click [ Apply ].

180

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Auto E-mail Notification

A

In the menu area, click [ Auto E-mail Notification ].

The dialog box for making notification settings appears.

B

Make the following settings:

• Notification Messages

• Items in the Groups to Notify column

• Items in the Select Groups/Items to Notify column

To make detailed settings for these items, click [ Edit ] next to [ Details of Email Notification Settings ] .

C

Click [ Apply ].

D

Quit Web Image Monitor.

On-demand E-mail Notification

A

In the menu area, click [ On-demand E-mail Notification ].

The dialog box for making notification settings appears.

B

Make the following settings:

• Notification Subject

• Items in the Access Restriction to Information Column

• Items in the Receivable E-mail Address/Domain Name Settings Column

C

Click [ Apply ].

D

Quit Web Image Monitor.

181

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Remote Maintenance by telnet

❒ Remote Maintenance should be password-protected so that access is allowed to administrators only.

❒ The password is the same as the one of Web Image Monitor administrator.

When the password is changed using "mshell", other passwords change also.

❒ Some commands cannot be used depending on your printer.

Using telnet

Follow the procedure below to use telnet.

❒ Only one user at a time can log on to perform remote maintenance.

A

Use the IP address or the host name of the printer to start telnet.

% telnet “IP_address”

B

Enter your user name and password.

To use default account, enter “admin” as user name, and leave the password blank.

C

Enter a command.

D

Quit telnet.

msh> logout

The configuration message about saving the changes appears.

E

Enter "yes" to save the changes, and then press the { # Enter } key.

If you do not want to save the changes, enter "no", and then press the { # Enter } key. To make further changes, enter "return" at the command line, and then press the { # Enter } key.

❒ If the message "Can not write NVRAM information" appears, the changes are not saved. Repeat the procedure above.

❒ When the changes are saved, the network interface board is reset automatically with that changes.

❒ When the network interface board resets, the print job in print process will be printed. However, print jobs in queue will be canceled.

182

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

access

Use the “access” command to view and configure access control. You can also specify two or more access ranges.

View settings

msh> access

Configuration

msh> access

range “start-address end-address”

• ✩ represents a target number between 1 and 5. (Up to five access ranges can be registered and selected.)

Example: to specify accessible IP addresses between 192.168.0.10 and

192.168.0.20: msh> access 1 range 192.168.0.10 192.168.0.20

Access control initialization

msh> access flush

• Use the "flush" command to restore the default settings so that all access ranges become "0.0.0.0".

The access range restricts computers from use of the printer by IP address.

If you do not need to restrict printing, make the setting "0.0.0.0".

❒ Valid ranges must be from lower (start address) to higher (end address).

Up to five access ranges can be specified. The entry is invalid if the target number is omitted.

You cannot access Web Image Monitor from a restricted IP address.

appletalk

Use the “appletalk” command to view and configure Appletalk parameters.

View settings

msh> appletalk

• [2] means "active" and [0] means "inactive".

• The default is [2].

Changing PAP timeout configuration

msh> appletalk ptimeout value > 0

• Timeout value becomes effective.

msh> appletalk ptimeout value = 0

183

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• Timeout value becomes ineffective.

autonet

Use the “autonet” command to configure AutoNet parameters.

View settings

The following command displays the current AutoNet settings: msh> autonet

Configuration

You can configure AutoNet settings.

msh> autonet {on|off}

• {on} means "active" and {off} means "inactive".

Current interface priority configuration display

msh> autonet priority

Interface priority configuration

msh> autonet priority “interface_name”

• You can give interface's AutoNet parameter priority.

• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

❒ If an interface is not selected, the current interface connection settings remain in effect.

For details about AutoNet, refer to autonet parameters.

btconfig

Use the "btconfig" command to make Bluetooth™ settings.

View settings

Bluetooth™ settings are displayed.

msh> btconfig

184

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Mode settings

You can set the Bluetooth™ operation mode to {private} or {public}.

msh> btconfig {private | public}

• The default is {public}.

devicename

Use the "devicename" command to display and change the printer name.

View settings

msh> devicename

Printer name configuration

msh> devicename name “string”

• Enter a printer name using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.

• Set single names for each printer.

Printer name initialization

msh> devicename clearname

• Reset the printer name to its default.

dhcp

Use the "dhcp" command to configure DHCP settings.

View settings

The following command displays the current DHCP settings.

msh> dhcp

Configuration

You can configure DHCP.

msh> dhcp “interface_name” {on|off}

• Click {on} to enable dhcp. Click {off} to disable DHCP.

• If the DNS server address and domain name are obtained from DHCP, be sure to click {on}.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

185

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Interface name wlan

Interface configured

IEEE 802.11b interface

Current interface priority configuration display

msh> dhcp priority

Interface priority configuration

msh> dhcp priority “interface_name”

• You can select which interface has DHCP parameter priority.

• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.

DNS server address selection

msh> dhcp dnsaddr {dhcp | static}

• Specify whether to obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server or use the address set by a user.

• To obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server, specify "dhcp".

To use the address set by a user, specify "static".

Domain name selection

msh> dhcp domainname {dhcp | static}

• Specify whether to obtain the domain name from the DNS server or use the domain name set by a user.

• To obtain the domain name from the DHCP server, specify "dhcp". To use the domain name set by a user, specify "static".

For details about DHCP functions, see p.282 “Using DHCP” .

For details about setting the DNS server address, see p.187 “dns” .

For details about setting the domain name, see p.188 “domainname” .

diprint

The direct printing port enables direct printing from a network-connected computer.

Use the “diprint” command to change direct printing port settings.

View settings

The following command displays the current direct printing port settings: msh> diprint

Example output: port 9100 timeout=300(sec) bidirect on

186

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• The “Port” specifies the port number of the direct printing port.

• The “bidirect” setting indicates whether the direct printing port is bidirectional or not.

Setting timeout

msh> diprint timeout [30~65535]

• You can specify the timeout interval to use when the printer is expecting data from the network.

• The default is 300 seconds.

Setting bidirect

msh> diprint bidirect {on | off}

• You can specify whether the direct printing port is bidirectional or not.

dns

Use the “dns” command to configure or display DNS (Domain Name System) settings.

View settings

The following command displays current DNS settings: msh> dns

DNS server configuration

The following command enables or disables the DNS server address: msh> dns “number” server “server address”

The following command displays a configuration using the IP address

192.168.15.16 on a DNS 1 server: msh> dns 1 server 192.168.15.16

• You can register up to three DNS server numbers.

• You cannot use “255.255.255.255” as the DNS server address.

Dynamic DNS function setting

msh> dns “interface_name” ddns {on|off}

• You can set the dynamic DNS function "active" or "inactive".

• {on} means "active" and {off} means "inactive".

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

187

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Interface name wlan

Interface configured

IEEE 802.11b interface

Specifying the record overlap operation

msh> dns overlap {update|add}

• You can specify operations performed when records overlap.

• update

To delete old records and register new records.

• add

To add new records and store the old records.

• When CNAME overlaps, it is always changed, irrespective of settings.

CNAME registration

msh> dns cname {on|off}

• You can specify whether to register CNAME.

• {on} means "active" and {off} means "inactive".

• The CNAME registered is the default name beginning with rnp. CNAME cannot be changed.

A records registration

msh> dns arecord {dhcp|own}

• {dhcp}

You can specify the method of registering an A record when the dynamic

DNS function is enabled and DHCP is used.

• {own}

To register an A record using the printer as the DNS client.

The DNS server address and the domain name already designated are used for the registration.

Record updating interval settings

msh> dns interval “time”

• You can specify the interval after which records are updated when using the dynamic DNS function.

• The updating interval is specified hourly. It can be entered between 1 and

255 hours.

• The default is 24 hours.

domainname

Use the "domainname" command to display or configure the domain name settings.

188

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

You can configure the Ethernet interface, IEEE 1394 interface, or IEEE 802.11b

interface.

View settings

The following command displays the current domain name: msh> domainname

Interface domain configuration

msh> domainname “interface_name”

Setting the Domain Name

msh> domainname “interface_name” name “domain name”

• A domain name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.

• The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same domain name.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface ether ip1394 wlan

Interface set

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

Deleting the Domain Name

msh> domainname “interface_name” clear

help

Use the "help" command to display the available command list and the procedures for using those commands.

Command list display

msh> help

Display of procedure for using commands

msh> help “command_name”

hostname

Use the “hostname” command to change the printer name.

View settings

msh> hostname

189

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Configuration

msh> hostname “interface_name ” “printer_name”

• Enter the printer name using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.

• You cannot use a printer name starting with "RNP" or "rnp".

• The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same printer name.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

Initializing the printer name for each interface

msh>hostname interface_name clear name

ifconfig

Use the "ifconfig" command to configure TCP/IP (IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, default gateway address) for the printer.

View settings

msh> ifconfig

Configuration

msh> ifconfig “interface_name” “parameter” “address”

• If you did not enter an interface name, it is automatically set to the Ethernet interface.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet Interface

IEEE 1394 Interface

IEEE 802.11b Interface

Netmask configuration

msh> ifconfig “interface_name” netmask “address”

Broadcast address configuration

msh> ifconfig “interface_name” broadcast “address”

190

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Changing the Interface

msh> ifconfig “interface” up

• You can specify either the Ethernet interface or IEEE 802.11b interface when using the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit.

You cannot specify the IEEE 1394 interface.

The following explains how to configure an IP address 192.168.15.16 on Ethernet interface.

msh> ifconfig ether 192.168.15.16

The following explains how to configure a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 on Ethernet interface.

msh> ifconfig ether netmask 255.255.255.0

To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator.

❒ Use the default configuration if you cannot obtain setting addresses.

❒ The IP address, subnet mask and broadcast address are the same as that for the ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface.

❒ When installing the optional 1394 Interface board, set the IP address and subnet mask so that it does not overlap with the ethernet interface or the IEEE

1394 interface.

TCP/IP configuration is the same for both Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b interface. If interfaces are changed, the new interface inherits the configuration.

Use "0x" as the initial two letters of a hexadecimal address.

info

Use the "info" command to display printer information such as paper tray, output tray, and printer language.

Printer information display

msh> info

For details about displayed contents, see p.211 “Getting Printer Information over the Network” .

ipp

Use the “ipp” command to configure IPP settings.

Viewing settings

The following command displays the current IPP settings: msh> ipp

Example output:

191

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer timeout=900(sec) auth basic

• The “timeout” setting specifies how many seconds the computer tries to send print jobs when no connection can be made to the network printer.

• The “auth” setting indicates the user authorization mode.

IPP timeout configuration

Specify how many seconds the computer waits before canceling an interrupted print job. The time can be entered between 30 to 65535 seconds.

msh> ipp timeout [30 - 65535]

IPP user authorization configuration

Use IPP user authorization to restrict users to print with IPP. The default is

“off”.

msh> ipp auth {basic|digest|off}

• User authorization settings are “basic” and “digest”.

• Use “off” to remove a user's authorization.

• If user authorization is specified, register a user name. You can register up to 10 users.

IPP user configuration

Use the following command: msh> ipp user

The following message appears: msh> Input user number (1 to 10):

Enter the number, user name, and password.

msh> IPP user name:user1 msh> IPP password:*******

After configuring the settings, the following message appears:

User configuration changed.

netware

Use the “netware” command to configure the NetWare settings such as the print server name or file server name.

Netware Printer Server Names

msh> netware pname

• Enter the NetWare print server name using up to 47 characters.

Netware File Server Names

msh> netware fname

• Enter the NetWare file server name using up to 47 characters.

192

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Encap type

msh> netware encap [802.3/802.2/snap/ethernet2/auto]

Remote Printer Number

msh> netware rnum

Timeout

msh> netware timeout

Printer server mode

msh> netware mode pserver msh> netware mode ps

Remote printer mode

msh> netware mode rprinter msh> netware mode rp

NDS context name

msh> netware context

SAP interval

msh> netware “sap interval”

Setting login mode for file server

msh> netware login server

Setting login mode for NDS tree

msh> netware login tree

Setting login mode for NDS tree name

msh> netware tree “NDS name”

passwd

Use the “passwd” command to change the remote maintenance password.

Changing the Password

msh> passwd

• Enter the current password.

• Enter the new password.

• Enter the new password once again.

❒ Be sure not to forget or lose the password.

193

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

❒ The password can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, "R" is not the same as "r".

prnlog

Use the “prnlog” command to obtain printer log information.

Print logs display

msh> prnlog

• Displays 16 previous print jobs.

msh> prnlog ID Number

• Specify the ID number of the displayed print log information to display additional details about a print job.

For details about displayed contents, see p.211 “Getting Printer Information over the Network” .

rendezvous

Use the “rendezvous” command to display rendezvous-related settings.

View settings

Rendezvous settings are displayed.

msh> rendezvous

Current computer name display

msh> rendezvous cname

Display information about the current printer location

msh> rendezvous location

Rendezvous computer name setting

You can specify the rendezvous computer name.

msh> rendezvous cname “computer name”

• The computer name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.

rendezvous Installation location information setting

You can enter information about the location where the printer is installed.

msh> rendezvous location “location”

• Information about location can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

194

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Setting order of priority for each protocol

• diprint msh> rendezvous diprint [0–99]

• lpr msh> rendezvous lpr [0–99]

• ipp msh> rendezvous ipp [0–99]

You can specify the order of priority for “diprint”, “lpr”, and “ipp”. Smaller numbers indicate higher priority.

IP TTL setting

msh> rendezvous ipttl {1-255}

You can specify the IP TTL (the number of routers a packet can pass through).

The default is 255.

Resetting the computer name and location information

You can reset the computer name and location information.

msh> rendezvous clear {cname | location}

• cname

Reset the computer name. The default computer name will be displayed when the computer is restarted.

• location

Reset the location information. The previous location information will be deleted.

Interface configuration

msh> rendezvous linklocal “interface_name”

• If many types of interface are installed, configure the interface that communicates with linklocal address.

• If you do not specify an interface, the Ethernet interface is automatically selected.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

195

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

route

Use the “route” command to control the routing table.

All route information display

msh> route

Specified route information display

msh> route “destination”

• Specify the IP address to destination.

Enabling/disabling Specified Destination

msh> route active {host|net} “destination” {on | off}

• You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes the default setting.

Adding Routing Table

msh> route add {host|net} “destination” “gateway”

• Adds a host or network route to “destination”, and a gateway address to

“gateway” in the table.

• Specify the IP address to destination and gateway.

• Host becomes the default setting.

Setting Default Gateway

msh> route add default gateway

Deleting Specified destination from Routing Table

msh> route delete {host|net} “destination”

• Host becomes the default setting.

• IP address of destination can be specified.

Route Flush

msh> route flush

❒ The maximum number of routing tables is 16.

❒ Set a gateway address when communicating with devices on an external network.

❒ The same gateway address is shared by all interfaces.

196

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

set

Use the "set" command to set the protocol information display "active" or "inactive".

View settings

The following command displays protocol information (active/inactive).

msh> set tcpip msh> set appletalk msh> set netware msh> set smb msh> set scsiprint

• scsiprint is available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.

msh> set ip1394

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

msh> set protocol

• When protocol is specified, information about TCP/IP, appletalk, netware, and smb appears.

msh> set lpr msh> set ftp msh> set rsh msh> set diprint msh> set web msh> set snmp msh> set ssl msh> set nrs msh> set rfu msh> set ipp msh> set http msh> set rendezvous

Configuration

• Enter “up”to enable protocol, and enter “down” to disable protocol.

You can set the protocol to "active" or "inactive".

msh> set tcpip {up | down}

• If you disable TCP/IP, you cannot use remote access after logging off. If you did this by mistake, you can use the control panel to enable remote access via TCP/IP.

197

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• Disabling TCP/IP also disables ip1394, lpr, ftp, rsh, diprint, web, snmp, ssl, ipp, http, and rendezvous msh> set appletalk {up | down} msh> set netware {up | down} msh> set smb {up | down} msh> set scsiprint {up | down}

• scsiprint is available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.

msh> set ip1394 {up | down}

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

msh> set lpr {up | down} msh> set ftp {up | down} msh> set rsh {up | down} msh> set diprint {up | down} msh> set web {up | down} msh> set snmp {up | down} msh> set ssl {up | down}

• If Secured Sockets Layer (SSL, an encryption protocol) function is not available for the printer, you cannot use the function by enabling it.

msh> set nrs {up | down} msh> set rfu {up | down} msh> set ipp {up | down} msh> set http {up | down} msh> set rendezvous {up | down}

show

Use the "show" command to display network interface board configuration settings.

View settings

msh> show

• If "-p" is added, you can view settings one by one.

For details about the information displayed, see p.220 “Configuring the Network Interface Board” .

198

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

slp

Use “slp” command to configure SLP settings.

msh> slp ttl “ttl_val”

• You can search the NetWare server using SLP in the PureIP environment of

NetWare 5/5.1 and Netware 6/6.5. Using the "slp" command, you can configure the value of TTL which can be used by SLP multicast packet.

• The default value of TTL is 1. A search is executed only within a local segment. If the router does not support multicast, the settings are not available even if the TTL value is increased.

• The acceptable TTL value is between 1 and 255.

smb

Use the “smb” command to configure or delete the computer or workgroup name for SMB.

Computer Name settings

msh> smb comp

• Set computer name using up to 15 characters. Names beginning with

"RNP" or "rnp" cannot be entered.

Working Group Name settings

msh> smb group

• Set workgroup name using up to 15 characters

Comment settings

msh> smb comment

• Set comment using up to 31 characters

Notify print job completion

msh> smb notif {on | off}

• To notify print job completion, specify “on”. Otherwise, specify “off”

Deleting Computer Name

msh> smb clear comp

Deleting Group Name

msh> smb clear group

Deleting Comment

msh> smb clear comment

199

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Protocol settings

msh> smb protocol [netbeui {up | down} | tcpip {up | down}]

• Enable or disable NetBEUI and TCP/IP. Specify “up” to enable, and “down” to disable.

snmp

Use the “snmp” command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such as the community name.

View settings

msh> snmp

• Default access settings 1 is as follows:

Community name:public

IP address:0.0.0.0

Access type:read-only / trap off

• Default access settings 2 is as follows:

Community name:admin

IP address:0.0.0.0

Access type:read-write / trap off

• If "-p" is added, you can view settings one by one.

• To display the current community, specify its registration number.

Display

msh> snmp ?

Community name configuration

msh> snmp “number” name “community_name”

• You can configure ten SNMP access settings numbered 1-10.

• The printer cannot be accessed from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client if “public” is not registered in numbers 1-10.

When changing the community name, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and SNMP Setup Tool to correspond with printer settings.

• The community name can be entered using up to 15 characters.

Deleting community name

msh> snmp “number” clear name

Access type configuration

msh> snmp “number” type “access_type”

Access type no

Type of access permission not accessible

200

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Access type read write trap

Type of access permission read only read and write user is notified of trap messages

Protocol configuration

msh> snmp {ip | ipx} {on | off}

• Use the following command to set protocols "active" or "inactive": If you set a protocol "inactive", all access settings for that protocol are disabled.

• Specify "ip" for TCP/IP, or "ipx" for IPX/SPX.

• {on} means "active" and {off} means "inactive".

• IEEE 1394 interface is available for TCP/IP only.

Configuration of protocol for each registration number

msh> snmp “number” active {ip | ipx} {on | off}

• To change the protocol of access settings, use the following command.

However, if you have disabled a protocol with the above command, activating it here has no effect.

Access configuration

msh> snmp “number” {ip/addr | ipx} “address”

• You can configure a host address according to the protocol used.

• The network interface board accepts requests only from hosts that have addresses with access types of "read-only" or "read-write". Enter “0” to have network interface board accept requests from any host without requiring a specific type of access.

• Enter a host address to deliver "trap" access type information to.

• To specify TCP/IP, enter "ip" followed by a space, and then the IP address.

• To specify IPX/SPX, enter "ipx" followed by a space, the IPX address followed by a decimal, and then the MAC address of the network interface board.

sysLocation configuration

msh> snmp location

Deleting sysLocation

msh> snmp clear location

sysContact setting

msh> snmp contact

201

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Deleting sysContact

msh> snmp clear contact

SNMP v1v2 function configuration

msh> snmp v1v2 {on | off}

• Specify "on" to enable, and "off" to disable.

SNMP v3 function configuration

msh> snmp v3 {on | off}

• Specify "on" to enable, and "off" to disable.

SNMP TRAP configuration

msh> snmp trap {v1 | v2 | v3} {on | off}

• Specify "on" to enable, and "off" to disable.

Remote Configuration Authorization configuration

msh> snmp remote {on | off}

• Specify "on" to enable, and "off" to disable.

SNMP v3 TRAP configuration display

msh> snmp v3trap msh> snmp v3trap {1- 5}

• If a number from 1-5 is entered, settings are displayed for that number only.

Configuring a sending address for SNMP v3 TRAP

msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} {ip| ipx} address

Configuring a sending protocol for SNMP v3 TRAP

msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} active {ip/addr | ipx} {on | off}

Configuring a user account for SNMP v3 TRAP

msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} account “account_name”

• Enter an account name using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

Deleting an SNMP v3 TRAP user account

msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} clear account

Configuring an SNMP v3 encryption algorithm

msh> snmp v3auth {md5 | sha1}

Configuring SNMP v3 encryption

msh> snmp v3priv {auto | on}

202

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• If you select "auto", the print job will be encrypted when encryption is possible.

• If you select "on", Clear Text communication is not possible, and encryption password must be set before encryption communication can be used.

Encryption is possible when the security option is installed correctly and the password is specified.

sntp

The printer clock can be synchronized with a NTP server clock using Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). Use the "sntp" command to change SNTP settings.

View settings

msh> sntp

NTP server address configuration

You can specify the IP address of the NTP server.

msh> sntp server “IP_address”

Interval configuration

msh> sntp interval “polling_time”

• You can specify the interval at which the printer synchronizes with the operator-specified NTP server. The default is 60 minutes.

• The interval can be entered between 16 and 16,384 minutes.

• If you set 0, the printer synchronizes with the NTP server only when you turn the printer on. After that, the printer does not synchronize with the NTP server.

Time-zone configuration

msh> sntp timezone “+/-hour_time”

• You can specify the time difference between the printer clock and NTP server clock. Time is in 24-hour format.

spoolsw

Use the “spoolsw” command to configure Job Spool settings.

You can only specify diprint, lpr, ipp, ftp and smb protocol.

• The “spoolsw” command for configuring Job Spool settings is available only when the optional hard disk is installed.

View settings

The Job Spool setting appears.

203

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer msh> spoolsw

Job Spool setting

msh> spoolsw spool {on | off}

❒ Specify "on" to enable Job Spool, or "off" to disable it.

Resetting Job spool setting

msh> spoolsw clear job {on | off}

• When the printer power is cut during job spooling, this determines whether to reprint the spooled job.

Protocol configuration

msh> spoolsw diprint {on | off} msh> spoolsw lpr {on | off} msh> spoolsw ipp {on | off} msh> spoolsw smb {on | off} msh> spoolsw ftp {on | off}

• You can specify the settings for diprint, lpr, ipp, and smb.

sprint

Use the "sprint" command to make settings for IEEE 1394 (SCSI print).

View settings

IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) settings are displayed.

msh> sprint

Bidirectional configuration for IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)

Use this setting to set IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) bidirectional.

The default is “on”.

msh> sprint bidi {on | off}

status

The printer status can be checked using the following command:

Messages

msh> status

For details, see p.211 “Current Printer Status”

204

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

syslog

Use the “syslog” command to display the information stored in the printer's system log.

View message

msh> syslog

❒ For details about the information displayed, see p.226 “System Log Information” .

upnp

Use the "upnp" command to display and configure the universal plug and play.

Public URL display

msh> upnp url

Public URL configuration

msh< upnp url “string”

• Enter the URL string in the character string.

web

Use the “web” command to display and configure parameters on Web Image

Monitor.

View Settings

msh> web

URL Configuration

You can set URLs linked by clicking [ URL ] on Web Image Monitor.

Specify "1" or "2" for x as the number corresponding to the URL. Up to two

URLs can be registered and specified.

msh> web url http://”The URL or IP address you want to register”/

Deleting URLs registered as link destinations

msh> web x clear url

Specify "1" or "2" for x as the corresponding number to the URL.

Link name configuration

You can enter the name for [ URL ] that appears on Web Image Monitor.

Specify "1" or "2" for x as the corresponding number to the link name.

205

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer msh> web name “Name you want to display”

Deleting URL names registered as link destinations

msh> web x clear name

Specify "1" or "2" for x as the number corresponding to the link name.

Help URL Configuration

You can set URLs linked by clicking [ Help ] or [ ?

] on Web Image Monitor.

msh> web help http://“Help URL or IP address”/help/

Deleting Help URL

msh> web clear help

wiconfig

Use the "wiconfig" command to make settings for IEEE 802.11b.

View settings

msh> wiconfig

View IEEE 802.11b settings

msh> wiconfig cardinfo

• If IEEE 802.11b is not working correctly, its information is not displayed.

Configuration

msh> wiconfig “parameter”

Parameter mode [ap|adhoc|802.11adhoc] ssid ID value

Value configured

You can set the infrastructure mode (ap) , the

802.11 Ad hoc mode (802.11adhoc), or the ad hoc mode (adhoc).

The default is ad hoc mode.

You can make settings for the SSID in the infrastructure mode.

Usable characters are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).

An SSID value is set automatically to the nearest access point if no setting is made.

If no setting is made for the ad hoc mode, the same value as for the infrastructure mode or an ASSID value is automatically set.

206

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Parameter channel frequency channel no.

enc [on|off] key [ key value ] val [1|2|3|4] keyphrase [ phrase ] val [1|2|3|4] encval [1|2|3|4]

Value configured

You can enable or disable the WEP function.

To enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to disable it, specify [off].

To start the WEP function, enter the correct

WEP key.

You can enable or disable the WEP function.

To enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to disable it, specify [off].

To start the WEP function, enter the correct

WEP key.

You can specify the WEP key when entering in hexadecimal.

With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use

26 digit hexadecimals.

Up to four WEP keys can be registered.

Specify the number to be registered with

“val”.

When a WEP is specified by key, the WEP specified by key phrase is overwritten.

To use this function, set the same key number and WEP key for all ports that transmit data to each other.

You can omit the numbers with “val”. The key number is set to 1 when making these omissions.

You can specify the WEP key when entering in ASCII.

With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use

26 digit hexadecimals.

Up to four WEP keys can be registered.

Specify the number to be registered with

“val”.

When a WEP is specified by key phrase, the

WEP specified by key is overwritten.

To use this function, set the same key number and WEP key for all ports that transmit data to each other.

You can omit the numbers with “val”. The key number is set to 1 when making these omissions.

You can specify which of the four WEP keys is used for packet encoding. “1” is set if a number is not specified.

207

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Parameter auth [open|shared] rate [auto|11m|5.5m|2m|1m]

Value configured

You can set an authorization mode when using WEP. The specified value and authorized mode are as follows: open: open system authorized (default) shared: shared key authorized rate

You can set the IEEE 802.11b transmitting speed.

The speed you specify here is the speed at which data is sent. You can receive data at any speed.

auto: automatically set (default)

11m: 11 Mbps fixed

5.5m: 5.5 Mbps fixed

2m: 2 Mbps fixed

1m: 1 Mbps fixed

wins

Use the "wins" command to configure WINS server settings.

Viewing settings

msh> wins

• If the IP address obtained from DHCP differs from the WINS IP address, the DHCP address is the valid address.

Configuration

msh> wins “interface_name” {on | off}

• {on} means "active" and {off} means "inactive".

• Be sure to specify the interface.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

Address configuration

Use the following command to configure a WINS server IP address: msh> wins “interface_name” {primary|secondary} “IP address”

208

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• Use the “primary” command to configure a primary WINS server IP address.

• Use the "secondary" command to configure a secondary WINS server IP address.

• Do not use “255.255.255.255” as the IP address.

NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Scope ID Selection

You can specify the NBT scope ID.

msh> wins “interface_name” scope “scope ID”

• The scope ID can be entered using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.

• Be sure to specify the interface.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

209

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

SNMP

The SNMP agent operating on UDP and IPX is incorporated into the built-in Ethernet board and optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit of this printer. Also, the

SNMP agent operating on UDP is incorporated in the optional IEEE 1394 interface board.

Using the SNMP manager, you can get information about the printer.

❒ If you changed the printer's community name, change the configuration of the connected computer accordingly, using SNMP Setup Tool. For details, see

SNMP Setup Tool Help.

The default community names are [ public ] and [ admin ] . You can get MIB information using these community names.

Start SNMP Setup Tool

• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0:

Click the [ Start ] button.

Point to [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ] on the [ Programs ] menu.

Click [ SNMP Setup Tool ] .

• Windows XP:

Click the [ Start ] button.

Point to [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ] on the [ All Programs ] menu.

Click [ SNMP Setup Tool ] .

Supported MIBs(SNMPv1/v2)

• MIB-II

• PrinterMIB

• HostResourceMIB

• RicohPrivateMIB

Supported MIBs(SNMPv3)

• MIB-II

• PrinterMIB

• HostResourceMIB

• RicohPrivateMIB

• SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB

• SNMP-TARGET-MIB

• SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB

• SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB

• SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB

210

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Getting Printer Information over the

Network

This section explains details of each item displayed in the printer status and information.

Current Printer Status

The printer status can be checked using the following commands:

• UNIX: Use the "lpq" command and "rsh", "rcp", and "ftp" parameters.

• mshell: Use the "status" command.

Messages

Access Restricted

Add staples (Booklet: Back)

Add staples (Booklet: Both)

Add staples (Booklet: Front)

Adjusting...

Call Service Center

Canceled

Canceling Job...

Card/Counter not inserted

Coin or amount not inserted

Coin/Key Counter not inserted

Configuring...

Cover Open: ADF

Cover Open: Duplex Unit

Cover Open: Finisher

Cover Open: Front

Cover Open: Front/Left

Cover Open: Paper Exit / Rear

Cover Open: Right

Cover Open: Top

Data Size Error

Description

The job was canceled because user have no authority.

The staple of booklet finisher (back) is exhausted.

The staple of booklet finisher is exhausted.

The staple of booklet finisher (front) is exhausted.

The machine is initializing or calibrating.

There is a malfunction in the machine.

The job is reset.

The job is being reset.

The machine is waiting for prepaid card or key.

The machine is waiting for coin to be inserted.

The machine is waiting for coin or key counter.

Setting is being changed.

The document feeder is open.

The cover of the duplex unit is open.

The cover of Finisher is open.

The front cover is open.

The front cover or left cover is open.

The paper exit cover or rear cover is open.

The right cover is open.

The top cover is open.

The data size error occurred.

211

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Empty: Black Toner

Empty: Cyan Toner

Empty: Magenta Toner

Empty: Yellow Toner

Energy Saver Mode

Error

Error at Printer: Red LED

Error in Printer

Error: Address Book

Error: Command Transmission

Error: DIMM Value

Error: Ethernet Board

Error: HDD Board

Error: IEEE1394 Board

Error: Memory Switch

Error: Optional Font

Error: Optional RAM

Error: Parallel I/F Board

Error: PDL

Error: USB Interface

Error: Wireless Card

Error: Wireless Card or Board

Exceed Booklet Stapling Limit

Full: Copy Tray

Full: Finisher

Full: Finisher Shift Tray

Full: Finisher Shift Tray 1, 2

Full: Finisher Upper Tray

Description

The black toner cartridge is almost empty.

The cyan toner cartridge is almost empty.

The magenta toner cartridge is almost empty.

The yellow toner cartridge is almost empty.

The machine is in Energy Saver Mode.

An error has occurred.

An error has occurred.

An error has occurred.

An error has occurred in the data of the address book.

An error has occurred in the machine.

A memory error occurred.

An Ethernet board error has occurred.

A hard disk drive board error has occurred.

An IEEE 1394 interface board error has occurred.

A memory switch error has occurred.

An error has occurred in the font file of the machine.

An error has occurred in the optional memory unit.

An error has occurred in the parallel interface.

An error has occurred in the page description language.

An error has occurred in the USB interface.

Wireless card is not inserted during start up, or the IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the wireless card is taken out after start up.

An error has occurred in the IEEE 802.11b interface unit.

The printing has exceeded the stapling limit of the booklet finisher.

The output paper tray is full.

Finisher tray is full.

Shift tray of Finisher is full.

The shift tray 1 and 2 of Finisher are full.

The upper tray of Finisher is full.

212

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Full: Hole Punch Receptacle

Full: Standard Tray

Full: Waste Toner

Full: Waste Toner Bottle

Hex Dump Mode

Immed. Trans. not connected

Immediate Transmission Failed

In Use: Copier

In Use: Fax

In Use: Finisher

In Use: Input Tray

In Use: Staple Unit

Independent-supplier Toner

Key Card not inserted

Key Card/Counter not inserted

Key Counter not inserted

Loading Toner...

Low: Black Toner

Low: Cyan Toner

Low: Magenta Toner

Low: Toner

Low: Yellow Toner

Malfunction: Booklet Processor

Malfunction: Ext. Charge Unit

Malfunction: Finisher

Malfunction: Interposer

Malfunction: LargeCapacity Tray

Malfunction: Output Tray

Description

Punch Chip receptacle for hole punch is full.

The output paper tray is full.

Waste toner is full.

Waste toner bottle is full.

It is a hex dump mode.

It did not connect directly with the other party of the transmission.

An error has occurred while transmitting directly.

The copier is being used.

The fax is being used.

Other functions is using Finisher.

Other functions is using the input tray.

Other functions is using the staple unit.

Toner that is not recommended is set.

The machine is waiting for key card to be inserted.

The machine is waiting for key card or key counter to be inserted.

The machine is waiting for key counter to be left in it.

Toner is being supplied.

The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

The cyan toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

The magenta toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

The yellow toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

There is a problem with booklet finisher.

There is a problem with external charge unit.

There is a problem with Finisher.

There is a problem with Interposer.

There is a problem with LargeCapacity tray.

There is a problem with output tray.

213

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Malfunction: Staple Unit

Malfunction: Tray 1

Malfunction: Tray 2

Malfunction: Tray 3

Malfunction: Tray 4

Malfunction: Z-folding unit

Memory Low: Copy

Memory Low: Data Storage

Memory Low: Fax Scanning

Memory Low: Scanning

Miscellaneous Error

Mismatch: Paper Size

Mismatch: Paper Size and Type

Mismatch: Paper Type

Near Replacing: Black PCU

Near Replacing: Color PCU

Near Replacing: Develop. Unit C

Near Replacing: Develop. Unit K

Near Replacing: Develop. Unit M

Near Replacing: Develop. Unit Y

Near Replacing: Fusing Unit

Near Replacing: Maintenance Kit

Near Replacing: Transfer Unit

Nearly Full: Waste Toner

Need more Staples

No Paper: Interposer Tray

No Paper: LCT

No Paper: Selected Tray

No Paper: Tray 1

No Paper: Tray 2

Description

There is a problem with the staple unit.

There is a problem with tray 1.

There is a problem with tray 2.

There is a problem with tray 3.

There is a problem with tray 4.

There is a problem with the Z fold unit.

Memory shortage has occurred while the copy was operating.

Memory shortage has occurred while the document was being accumulated.

Memory shortage has occurred while transmitting the fax.

Memory shortage has occurred while the scanner was working.

Other error has occurred.

Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected size.

Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected size and type.

Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected type.

Prepare the new black photoconductor unit.

Prepare the new color photoconductor unit.

Prepare the new development unit (cyan).

Prepare the new development unit (black).

Prepare the new development unit (magenta).

Prepare the new development unit (yellow).

Prepare the new fusing unit.

Prepare the new maintenance kit.

Prepare the new transfer unit.

Waste toner bottle is nearly full.

Stapler has almost run out of staples.

There is no paper in interposer unit.

There is no paper in Large Capacity tray.

There is no paper in specified tray.

There is no paper in tray 1.

There is no paper in tray 2.

214

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

No Paper: Tray 3

No Paper: Tray 4

Not Detected: B2 Lever

Not Detected: Black Toner

Not Detected: Cyan Toner

Not Detected: Develop. Unit (C)

Not Detected: Develop. Unit (K)

Not Detected: Develop. Unit (M)

Not Detected: Develop. Unit (Y)

Not Detected: Duplex Feed Unit

Not Detected: Finisher

Not Detected: Fusing Unit

Not Detected: Input Tray

Not Detected: Interposer

Not Detected: LCT

Not Detected: Magenta Toner

Not Detected: PCU (C)

Not Detected: PCU (K)

Not Detected: PCU (M)

Not Detected: PCU (Y)

Not Detected: Toner Magazine

Not Detected: Transfer Roller

Not Detected: Transfer Unit

Not Detected: Tray 1

Not Detected: Tray 2

Not Detected: Tray 3

Not Detected: Tray 4

Not Detected: WasteToner Bottle

Description

There is no paper in tray 3.

There is no paper in tray 4.

B2 lever is not correctly set.

Black toner is not correctly set.

Cyan toner is not correctly set.

The development unit (cyan) is not correctly set.

The development unit (black) is not correctly set.

The development unit (magenta) is not correctly set.

The development unit (yellow) is not correctly set.

The duplex feed unit is not correctly set.

Finisher is not correctly set.

The fusing unit is not correctly set.

The paper feed tray is not correctly set.

Interposer unit is not correctly set.

A large amount of paper feed tray is not correctly set.

Magenta toner is not correctly set.

The photoconductor unit (cyan) is not correctly set.

The photoconductor unit (black) is not correctly set.

The photoconductor unit (magenta) is not correctly set.

The photoconductor unit (yellow) is not correctly set.

The toner cartridge is not correctly set.

The transfer roler is not correctly set.

The transfer unit is not correctly set.

Tray 1 is not correctly set.

Tray 2 is not correctly set.

Tray 3 is not correctly set.

Tray 4 is not correctly set.

Waste toner bottle is not correctly set.

215

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Not Detected: Yellow Toner

Not Detected: Z-fold'g Internal

Not Reached, Data Deleted

Not Reached, Data Removed

Not Reached, Data Stored

Offline

Original on Exposure Glass

Panel Off Mode

Panel Off Mode>>Printing ava.

Paper in Duplex Unit

Paper in Finisher

Paper Misfeed: ADF

Paper Misfeed: Duplex Unit

Paper Misfeed: Input Tray

Paper Misfeed: Internal/Output

Paper Misfeed: Output Tray

Paper on Finisher Shift Tray 2

Paper on FinisherShiftTray1, 2

Prepaid Card not inserted

Print Complete

Printing

Processing

RC Gate Connection Error

Ready

Replace Black PCU

Replace Charger

Replace Cleaning Web

Replace Color PCU

Replace Develop. Unit

Replace Develop. Unit (Black)

Description

Yellow toner is not correctly set.

The Z fold unit is not correctly set.

Unreached job is deleted.

Unreached job is deleted.

Unreached job is preserved.

Printer is offline.

The original remains on the exposure glass.

The machine is in Panel-Off mode.

The machine is in Control Panel-Off mode.

The paper remains in the duplex unit.

The paper remains in Finisher.

The paper has jammed in Document Feeder.

The paper has jammed in the duplex unit.

The paper has jammed in the input tray.

The paper has jammed inside the machine.

The paper has jammed in output tray.

The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 2.

The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 1 and

2.

The machine is waiting for prepaid card to be inserted.

The print was completed.

Printing is in progress.

Data is being processed.

Failed connection with RC Gate.

The machine is ready to print.

It is time to replace the black photoconductor unit.

It is time to replace the charger kit.

It is time to replace the Cleaning Web.

It is time to replace the photoconductor unit

(color).

It is time to replace the development unit.

It is time to replace the development unit

(black).

216

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Replace Develop. Unit (Color)

Replace Develop. Unit (Cyan)

Replace Develop. Unit (Magenta)

Replace Develop. Unit (Yellow)

Replace Fusing Unit

Replace Maintenance Kit

Replace PCU

Replace Transfer Belt

SD Card Authentication failed

Setting Remotely

Skipped due to Error

Storage Complete

Storage Failed

Supplies Order Call failed

Suspend / Resume Key Error

Transmission Aborted

Transmission Complete

Transmission Failed

Tray Error: Chaptering

Tray Error: Duplex Printing

Unit Left Open: ADF

Warming Up...

Description

It is time to replace the development unit

(color).

It is time to replace the development unit (cyan).

It is time to replace the development unit (magenta).

It is exchange time of the development unit

(yellow).

It is time to replace the fusing unit.

It is time to replace the maintenance kit.

It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.

It is time to replace the transfer belt.

SD card authentication failed.

The RDS setting is being processed.

Skipped the error.

The storage is complete.

The storage has failed.

The supply order call has failed.

Finisher stop button was pressed.

The transmission was interrupted.

The transmission completion was completed.

The transmission has failed.

The paper feed tray specification error has occurred because chaptering as well as the normal paper use the same tray for printing.

Selected paper tray cannot be used for duplex printing.

Document feeder is opened.

The machine is warming up.

❒ For details about UNIX commands, see UNIX Supplement .

Check the error contents that may be printed in the configuration page. For details about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “List/Test Print Menu” .

Printer configuration

You can check the printer configuration using telnet.

217

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

This section explains the checking procedure for input/output tray and printer language.

• UNIX: Use the "info" command and "rsh", "rcp", and "ftp" parameters.

• mshell: Use the "info" command.

Input Tray

Item

No.

Name

PaperSize status

Description

ID number of the paper tray

Name of the paper tray

Size of paper loaded in the paper tray

Current status of the paper tray

• Normal:Normal

• NoInputTray: No tray

• PaperEnd:No paper

Output Tray

Item

No.

Name status

Description

ID number of the output tray

Name of the output tray

Current status of the output tray

• Normal:Normal

• PaperExist:Paper exist

• OverFlow:Paper is full

• Error:Other errors

Emulation

Item

No.

Name

Version

Description

ID number of the printer language used by the printer

Name of the printer language used in the printer

Version of the printer language

❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement .

❒ For details about mshell “info” commands, see p.191 “info” .

218

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Understanding the Displayed Information

This section explains how to read status information returned by the network interface board.

Print Job Information

Use the following command to display print job information:

• UNIX: Use the "info" command and "rsh", "rcp", and "ftp" parameters.

• mshell: Use the "info" command.

Item

Rank

Owner

Job

Files

Total Size

Description

Print job status.

• Active

Printing or preparing for printing.

• Waiting

Waiting to be transferred to the printer.

Print request user name.

Print request number.

The name of the document.

The size of the data (spooled).

The default is 0 bytes.

For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement .

For details about mshell “info” commands, see p.191 “info” .

Print Log Information

This is a record of the most recent 16 jobs printed.

Use the following command to display print log information:

• UNIX: Use the "prnlog" command and "rsh", "rcp", and "ftp" parameters.

• telnet : Use the “prnlog” command. See p.194 “prnlog”

Item

ID

User

Page

Description

Print request ID.

Print request user name.

Number of pages printed

219

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Item

Result

Time

User ID

JobName

Description

Print Request Result

Communication Result

• OK

Print was completed normally. However, the print result may not be as required due to printer problems.

• NG

Printing was not completed normally.

• Canceled

An "rcp", "rsh", or "lpr" command print request was canceled, possibly due to the printing application. Not applicable to the

"ftp" or "rprinter" command.

Time the print requested was received.

Time of print request reception

Printer driver-configured User ID.

Appears when the print request ID is specified.

Name of the document for printing

Appears when the print request ID is specified.

❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement .

❒ For details about mshell prnlog commands, see p.194 “prnlog” .

Configuring the Network Interface Board

Use the following command to display network interface board settings:

• telnet : Use the “show” command.

Description Item

Common

mode

Protocol Up/Down

appletalk

TCP/IP

netware

SMB

IP over 1394

SCSI print

Ethernet interface

Syslog priority

NVRAM version

[ up ] means "active" and [ down ] means "inactive".

Internal version number

Internal version number

220

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Item

Device name

Comment location

Contact

Soft switch appletalk

mode

Net

Object

Type

Zone

TCP/IP

mode

ftp

lpr

rsh

telnet

diprint

web

http

ftpc

snmp

ipp

autonet

rendezvous

ssl

nbt

rfu

EncapType

dhcp

Host name

Address

netmask

Description

Printer name

Comment

Location of the printer in the SNMP and Rendezvous information

Administrator information for the printer and contact information in the SNMP information

AppleTalk protocol in selection

Network number

Macintosh printer name

Type of printer

Name of the zone that the printer belongs to

[ up ] means "active" and [ down ] means "inactive".

Frame type

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (on/off)

IP address

Subnet mask

221

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Item

broadcast

DNS Domain

gateway

Access Range[

]

Time server

Time Zone

Time server polling time

SYSLOG server

Home page URL

Home page link name netware

EncapType

RPRINTER number

Print server name

File server name

Context name

Switch

mode

NDS/Bindery

Packet negotiation

Login Mode

Print job timeout

protocol

SAP interval time

NDS Tree Name

SMB

Switch

mode

Direct print

Notification

Workgroup name

Computer name

Comment

Share name[1]

Description

Broadcast address

DNS domain type

Default gateway address

Access control range

NTP server address

NTP server time difference

NTP server interval

URL of homepage.

URL of home page

Frame type

Remote printer number

Print server name

Name of the connect file server

Context of print server

Active mode

(this value is fixed)

Login mode

Packet timeout

Protocol used

NDS tree name

(this value is fixed)

(this value is fixed)

Notification of print job completion

Name of the workgroup

Name of the computer

Comment

Share name (model of the printer)

222

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Description Item

protocol

IEEE 802.11b

Device Name

dhcp

Address

netmask

broadcast

DNS Domain

ssid

Channel range

Channel

Communication mode

Authentication

TX Rate

WEP encryption

Encryption key

IP over 1394

Host name

DHCP

Address

netmask

broadcast

DNS Domain

SCSI print

Bidi.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth mode

UPnP

URL dns

Server[X]:

Selected DNS Server

Domain Name

ether

Printer name

DHCP (on/off)

IP address

Subnet mask

Broadcast address

DNS domain type

SSID used

Channels available for use

Channel used

IEEE 802.11b interface transmitting mode

IEEE 802.11b interface speed

WEP enabled or disabled

WEP key

DHCP (on/off)

IP address

Subnet mask

Broadcast address

Bidirectional setting (on/off)

Bluetooth™ connection mode

IP address of the DNS server

Selected DNS server

Domain name on an Ethernet connection

223

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Item

wlan

ip1394 rendezvous

Computer Name

Rendezvous Name (ether)

Rendezvous Name (wlan)

Rendezvous Name (ip1394)

location

Priority (diprint)

Priority (lpr)

Priority (ipp)

IP TTL

LinkLocal Route for Multi I/F:

Ethernet (ether)

DDNS

ether

wlan ip1394 wins

ether

Primary WINS

Secondary WINS ip1394

Primary WINS

Secondary WINS

SNMP

SNMPv1v2

SNMPv3

protocol

Description

Domain name on a wireless LAN connection

Computer name

Rendezvous name on an Ethernet connection

Rendezvous name on a wireless LAN connection

Rendezvous name on an IP over 1394 connection

Location of the printer diprint priority number lpr priority number ipp priority number

IP TTL value

[IEEE 802.11b (wlan)] appears when IEEE 802.11b is selected. [IP over 1394 (ip1394)] appears when

IEEE1394 is selected.

Dynamic DNS function on an Ethernet connection

(on/off)

Dynamic DNS function on a wireless LAN connection

(on/off)

Dynamic DNS function on an IP over 1394 connection

(on/off)

IP address of the primary WINS server on an Ethernet connection

IP address of the secondary WINS server on an Ethernet connection

IP address of the primary WINS server on an IP over

1394 connection

IP address of the secondary WINS server on an IP over

1394 connection

224

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Description Item

v1Trap

v2Trap

v3Trap

SNMPv1v2Remoto Setting

SNMPv3 Privacy

Shell mode Mode of the remote maintenance tool

225

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message List

This is a list of messages that appear in the printer's system log. The system log can be viewed using the "syslog" command.

System Log Information

Use the following command to display the system log information:

• UNIX: Use the "syslog" command and "rsh", "rcp", and "ftp" parameters.

• telnet : Use the “syslog” command.

Message

Access to NetWare server <file server name> denied. Either there is no account for this print server on the NetWare server or the password was incorrect.

(In the print server mode) Login to the file server failed. Make sure that the print server is registered on the file server. If a password is specified for the print server, delete it.

add_sess: bad trap addr:<IpAddress>, community:<community name> add_sess: community<community name> already defined.

add_sess_ipx: bad trap addr: <IPXaddress>, community:<community name>

Problem and solutions

The IP address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when the community access type is TRAP. Specify the host IP address for the TRAP destination.

The same community name already exists.

Use another community name.

The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavailable when the community access type is

TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the

TRAP destination.

add_sess_ipx: community <community name> already defined.

The same community name already exists.

Use another community name.

ANONYMOUS FTP LOGIN FROM <IP address>, <password> anpd start. (AppleTalk)

An anonymous login has been made with a password <password> from the host <IP address>.

The ANPD (AppleTalk Network Package Daemon) service has started.

Attach FileServer= <file server name>

Attach to print queue <print queue name>

Connection to the file server as the nearest server has been established.

(In the print server mode) Attached to the print queue.

Cannot create service connection

Cannot find rprinter (<print server name>/<printer number>)

(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the file server has not been established. The number of file server users may have exceeded the maximum capacity of the file server.

The printer with the number displayed on the print server does not exist. Make sure that the printer number is registered on the print server.

226

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message

Change IP address from DHCP Server.

child process exec error! (process name)

DHCP server not found.

dhcpcd start.

Problem and solutions

The IP address changes when DHCP lease is renewed. To always assign the same IP address, set a static IP address to the DHCP server.

The network service failed to start. Turn the printer off and then on. If this does not work, contact your service or sales representative.

The IP address was successfully received from the DHCP server.

Login was from the host IP address.

Connected DHCP Server(<DHCP server address>).

connection from <IP address>

Could not attach to FileServer<error number> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the file server has not been established. The file server has refused the connection. Check the file server configuration.

Could not attach to PServer<print server> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the print server has not been established. The print server has refused the connection. Check the print server configuration.

Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps

Current IP address <current IP address>

Current IPX address<IPX address>

DHCP lease time expired.

Speed of the network (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps)

The IP address <current IP address> was received from the dhcp server.

Current ipx address

DHCP lease time has expired. The printer tries to discover the DHCP server again. The IP address until now becomes invalid.

The DHCP server was not found. Make sure that the DHCP is on the network.

The DHCPCD service (dhcp client service) has started.

Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from <MAC address>).

Established SPX Connection with PServer,(RPSocket=<socket number>, connID=<connection ID>) exiting

The same IP address is used. Each IP address must be unique. Check the address of the device indicated in [MAC address].

(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the print server has been established.

Exit pserver

Frametype =<frame type name> httpd start.

The lpd service has ended and the system is exiting the process.

(In the print server mode) The print server function is disabled because the necessary print server settings have not been made.

The frame type name is configured to be used on NetWare.

The httpd service has started.

227

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message inetd start.

IPP cancel-job: permission denied.

Problem and solutions

The inetd service has started.

The printer could not authenticate the name of the user attempting to cancel a job.

Printing with ipp is disabled.

Printing with ipp is enabled.

ipp disable.

ipp enable.

IPP job canceled. jobid=%d.

LeaseTime=<lease time>(sec), Renew-

Time=<renew time>(sec).

The spooled job was canceled due to error or user request.

The resource lease time received from the

DHCP server is displayed in [lease time] in seconds. The renewal time is displayed in [renew time] in seconds.

(In the print server mode) Login to the file server is in the NDS or BINDERY mode.

Login to fileserver <file server name>

(<IPX|IP>,<NDS|BINDERY|NDS|BINDERY>) multid start.

nbstart start. (NetBEUI) npriter start. (NetWare)

Data transmission service for multiprotocols has started.

The service for NetBEUI protocol stack setting has started.

Use a local broadcast to map the NetBIOS name with the IP address.

NBT Registration Broadcast(<NetBIOS name>) nbtd start.

The nbtd service has started (available only in the DHCP mode).

NetBEUI Computer Name =<computer name> The NetBEUI computer name is specified.

nmsd start. (NetBEUI) The nmsd (Name Server Daemon) service has started.

(In the remote printer mode) The NetWare service has started.

nwstart start. (NetWare)

Open log file <file name> papd start. (AppleTalk) phy release file open failed.

The service for NetWare protocol stack setting has started.

(In the print server mode) The specified log file has been opened.

The AppleTalk print service has started.

Replacing the network interface board is required. Contact your sales or service representative.

Print queue <print queue name> cannot be serviced by printer 0, <print server name>

(In the print server mode) The print queue cannot be established. Make sure that print queue exists on the specified file server.

Print server <print server name>has no printer. (In the print server mode) The printer is not assigned to the print server. Using NWadmin, assign the printer, and then restart it. print session full No more print jobs can be accepted.

228

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message

Printer <printer name> has no queue pserver start. (NetWare)

Problem and solutions

(In the print server mode) The print queue is not assigned to the printer. Using NWadmin, assign the print queue to the printer, and then restart it.

(In the print server mode) The NetWare service has started.

Required computer name (<Computer name>) is duplicated name

The start job found the computer name by adding the computer name to the suffix (0,1...). Set a new computer name that is unique.

Required file server (<file server name>) not found

The required file server is not found.

restarted.

sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sapname=<SAP name>

The lpd service has started.

The SAP function has started. The SAP packet is issued to advertise the service on the SAP table on the NetWare server.

session <community name> already defined.

The requested community name is not defined.

session_ipx <community name> not defined.

The requested community name is not defined.

Set context to <NDS context name> An NDS context name has been set.

shutdown signal received. network service rebooting...

The network service is rebooting.

smbd start. (NetBEUI) The smbd service has started.

SMTPC: failed to get smtp server ip-address.

The SMTP server IP address could not be obtained. This could be because:

• The specified DNS server could not be found.

• No connection to the network has been established.

• The specified DNS server could not be found.

• An incorrect DNS server is specified.

• The specified SMTP server IP address could not be found in the DNS server.

SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. timeout.

Connection to the SMTP server failed due to timeout. This could be because:

• The specified SMTP server name is incorrect.

• No connection to the network has been established.

• The network configuration is incorrect, so there is no response from the SMTP server.

229

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message

SMTPC: refused connect by smtp server.

SMTPC: no smtp server. connection close.

SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server.

SMTPC: username or password wasn’t correct. [response code] (information)

Snmp over ip is ready.

Snmp over IP over 1394 is ready.

Snmp over ipx is ready.

SNMPD: account is unavailable:

Same account name be used.

Problem and solutions

Connection to the SMTP server is denied. This could be because:

• A server other than the SMTP server has been specified.

• The specified SMTP server port number is incorrect.

Connection to the SMTP server failed due to no response from SMTP. This could be because:

• A server other than the SMTP server has been specified.

• The specified SMTP server port number is incorrect.

Connection to the SMTP server failed. This could be because:

• No connection to the network has been established.

• The network configuration is incorrect, so there is no response from the SMTP server.

• The specified SMTP server name is incorrect.

• An incorrect SMTP server is specified.

• The specified SMTP server IP address could not be found in the DNS server.

• A server other than the SMTP server has been specified.

• The specified SMTP server port number is incorrect.

Connection to the SMTP server failed. This could be because:

• The specified SMTP user name is incorrect.

• The specified SMTP password is incorrect.

Check the SMTP user name and password.

Communication over TCP/IP with snmp is available.

Communication over IP over 1394 with snmp is available.

Communication over IPX with snmp is available.

User account is disabled. This could be because it use the same account name as the administrator account.

230

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message

SNMPD: account is unavailable:

The authentication password is not set up.

SNMPD: account is unavailable: encryption is impossible.

SNMPD: trap account is unavailable.

Problem and solutions

User account is disabled. This could be because the authentication password is not set, and only the encryption account is set.

Encryption is not possible and account is disabled. This could be because:

• Security option is not installed.

• Encryption password has not been specified.

v3Trap cannot be sent. This could be because the Trap destination account is different from the account specified by the printer.

snmpd start.

started.

Started.

The snmpd service has started.

The direct print service has started.

The rendezvous function is enabled.

Terminated.

The rendezvous function is disabled.

The print server received error <error number> during attempt to log in to the network. Access to the network was denied.Verify that the print server name and password are correct.

Login to the file server failed. The print server is not registered or a password is specified.

Register the print server without specifying a password.

WINS name refresh :Server No Response There was no response to the update request from the print server. Check that the WINS server address is correct and the WINS server is working properly.

WINS name registration/refresh error code(errornumber)

Set unique NetBIOS names.

Check that the WINS server address is correct and the WINS server is working properly.

WINS name registration:Server No Response There was no response to the registration request from the server. Check that the WINS server address is correct and the WINS server is working properly.

WINS server address0.0.0.0

The WINS server was not specified. Specify the WINS server address to match the printer name with WINS.

The printer name was successfully registered.

WINS Server=<WINS server address> NetBI-

OS Name=<NetBIOS name>

WINS wrong scopeID The scope ID is incorrect.

Specify the correct scope ID.

For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement .

❒ For details about “syslog” command, see p.205 “syslog” .

231

Using a Printer Server

Preparing Printer Server

This section explains how to configure the printer as a Windows network printer.

The printer is configured to enabling network clients to use it. When the network printer is connected via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you can set the printing notification function to notify clients of the results of their print jobs.

❒ Under Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2000, to change printer properties in the [ Printer ] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator or member of the

PowerUsers group.

A

Open the [ Printers ] window from the [ Start ] menu.

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click

[ Properties ]. The printer properties appear.

C

On the [ Sharing ] tab, click [ Shared as: ].

D

To share the printer with users using a different version of Windows, click [ Additional Drivers...

].

❒ If you have installed an alternative driver by selecting [ Shared as: ] during the printer driver installation, this step can be ignored.

E

Click [ OK ]. Close the printer properties.

Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to configure the printer to use the printing notification function of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

Setting the print server

Under Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2000, to change printer properties in the [ Printer ] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator or member of the

PowerUsers group.

A

From the [ Start ] button on the task bar, point to [ Program ], point to [ Smart-

DeviceMonitor for Client ], and then click [ Print Server Settings ].

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

232

Using a Printer Server

The print server setting dialog box appears.

B

Select the [ Notify Client of Printing ] check box, and click [ OK ].

After print server setting is made, a dialog box appears. Confirm the dialog box content, and click [ OK ] .

Click [ Cancel ] to interrupt the procedure.

C

A dialog box appears for client setting. Click [ OK ].

The print server setting is complete. Each client must be set to receive print notification.

❒ Current printing jobs restart from the beginning after the spooler pauses briefly.

❒ When the expansion function is not used, the function is automatically set as available.

Setting a Client

A

From the [ Start ] button on the task bar, point to [ Program ], point to [ Smart-

DeviceMonitor for Client ], and then click [ Setting Expansion Function ].

A dialog box for setting the expansion function appears.

B

Select the [ Use the expansion function ] check box in [ Notify Printing ].

C

Select the [ Notify when using the print server ] check box.

D

Click [ OK ].

The dialog box for setting the expansion function closes. The client setting is completed.

❒ Set the printing notification function on the printer driver as well as on

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

233

Using a Printer Server

Using NetWare

This section describes the setting procedure for network printers in the NetWare environment. In the NetWare environment, you can connect the printer as a

“print server” or “remote printer”.

Setting procedure

• When using the printer as a print server

A

B

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Setting the network interface board.

C Turning the printer off and then back on.

• When using the printer as a remote printer

A Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

C

Setting the network interface board.

Setting NetWare.

D Starting the print server.

This procedure assumes an environment is already prepared for normal Net-

Ware running the printing service setting.

The procedure is explained with the following example settings:

• File server’s name …CAREE

• Print server’s name …PSERV

• Printer’s name …R-PRN

• Queue name …R-QUEUE

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

To use the printer in a NetWare environment, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin to set the NetWare printing environment.

❒ The NetWare Client provided by Novell is required to set the printing environment using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin under the following environments:

• NDS mode in Windows 95/98/Me

• NDS or Bindery mode in Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0

For details about installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see p.169 “Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin” .

234

Using a Printer Server

Printers listed by SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin lists printers connected to the network. If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, print configuration page, and then check the printer name.

Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)

Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server using Net-

Ware 3.x.

A

Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.

B

Start NIB Setup Tool from the [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Wizard ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Select a printer you want to configure.

E

Enter the printer name in the [ Device Name ] box and a comment in the

[ Comment ] box, and then click [ Next ].

F

Select the [ NetWare ] check box, and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ Bindery mode ], enter the file server name in the [ File Server Name ] box, and then click [ Next ].

In the [ File Server Name ] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print server is created. You can also click [ Browse ] to browse through available file servers.

H

Enter the print server name in the [ Print Server Name ] box, the printer name in the [ Printer Name ] box, and the print queue name in the [ Print Queue Name ] box, and then click [ Next ].

• In the [ Print Server Name ] box, enter the name of the NetWare print server using up to 47 characters.

• In the [ Printer Name ] box, enter the name of the NetWare printer.

• In the [ Print Queue Name ] box, enter the name of the print queue to be added to NetWare.

I

Check the settings, and then click [ Next ].

The settings are applied, and NIB Setup Tool quits.

J

Turn the printer off and then on again.

❒ To check that the configuration is made correctly, enter the following from the command prompt.

F:> USERLIST

235

Using a Printer Server

❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as a connected user.

❒ If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, check the printer name with the configuration page printed from the printer. For details about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “List/Test Print Menu” .

If no printer names appear in the list, match the frame types of IPX/SPXs for the computer and printer. Use the [ Network ] dialog box of Windows to change the frame type of the computer.

For details about changing the printer's frame type (“NW Frame Type”), see “Configuring the Printer”, Setup Guide.

Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5)

Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server using Net-

Ware 4.x, NetWare 5/5.1, or NetWare 6.0.

❒ When using the printer as a print server in NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5/5.1, or

NetWare 6.0, set it to the NDS mode.

❒ When using NetWare 5/5.1 or NetWare 6.0, set the printer as a print server.

A

Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.

B

Start NIB Setup Tool on the [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Wizard ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Select a printer you want to configure.

E

Enter the printer name in the [ Device Name ] box and a comment in the

[Comment] box, and then click [ Next ].

F

Select the [ NetWare ] check box, and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ NDS Mode ], enter the file server name in the [ File Server Name ] box, the NDS tree name in the [ NDS Tree: ] box, and the context in the [ NDS Context: ] box, and then click [ Next ].

In the [ File Server Name ] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print server is created. You can also click [ Browse ] to browse through available file servers and NDS context names.

In the [ NDS Tree: ] box, enter the name of the NDS tree in which a print server is created using up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Hyphens and underscores can also be used. You can also click [ Browse ] to browse through available

NDS trees.

236

Using a Printer Server

For a context, object names are entered from the lowest object with each object separated by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server in

NET under DS, enter "NET.DS".

H

Enter the print server name in the [ Print Server Name ] box, the printer name in the [ Printer Name ] box, the print queue name in the [ Print Queue Name ] box, and the print queue volume in the [ Print Queue Volume ] box, and then click [ Next ].

• In the [ Print Server Name ] box, enter the name of the NetWare print server using up to 47 characters.

• In the [ Printer Name ] box, enter the name of the NetWare printer.

• In [ Print Queue Name ] box, enter the print queue volume.

• In [ Print Queue Volume ] , type the print queue volume. For a volume, object names are entered from the lowest object with each object separated by a period. You can also click [ Browse ] to browse through available volumes.

I

Check the settings, and then click [ Next ].

The settings are applied, and NIB Setup Tool quits.

J

Turn the printer off and then on again.

❒ To check that the configuration is made correctly, enter the following from the command prompt.

F:> NLIST USER /A/B

❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as a connected user.

❒ If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, check the printer name with the configuration page printed from the printer. For details about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page” .

❒ If no printer names appear in the list, match the frame types of IPX/SPXs for the computer and printer. Use the [ Network ] dialog box of Windows to change the frame type of the computer.

For details about changing the printer's frame type (“NW Frame Type”), see “Configuring the Printer”, Setup Guide.

When using the printer in a pure IP environment of NetWare 5/5.1 or Net-

Ware 6.0/6.5, see p.237 “Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 or 6/6.5 Environment” .

Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 or 6/6.5 Environment

Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server in a pure IP environment of NetWare 5/5.1.

237

Using a Printer Server

When creating a queued print server in a pure IP environment of NetWare

5/5.1 or NetWare 6.0, create a print queue on the file server using NetWare

Administrator.

This printer is not available as a remote printer for use in a pure IP environment.

To use the printer in a pure IP environment, set it to TCP/IP.

Setting up using NIB Setup Tool

A

Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator equivalent.

B

Start NIB Setup Tool on the [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Property Sheet ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Select a printer you want to configure.

E

On the [ NetWare ] tab, Select [ File Server Mode ] or [ NDS Mode ] in the [ Logon

Mode ] area.

When [ File Server Mode ] is selected, the network connection is established based on the string entered in the [ File Server Name(F): ] box.

When [ NDS Mode ] is selected, the network connection is established based on the string entered in the [ NDS Tree: ] box.

F

In the [ Print Server Name ] box, enter the name of the print server.

G

In the [ File Server Name ] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print server is created.

You can also click [ Browse ] to browse through available file servers.

H

Enter the NDS tree name in the [ NDS Tree: ] box.

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Hyphens and underscores can also be used.

I

In the [ NDS Context: ] box, enter the context of the print server.

You can also click [ Browse ] to browse through available NDS trees and NDS contexts.

For a context, object names are entered from the lowest object with each object separated by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server in

Net under DS, enter "NET.DS".

238

Using a Printer Server

J

In the [ Print Server Operation Mode ] area, click [ As Print Server ].

K

Click [ OK ] to close the [ NIB Setup Tool ] dialog box.

Setting up using NWadmin

A

From Windows, start NWadmin.

For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.

B

Select the object in which the print queue is located in the directory tree, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

C

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Print Queue ], and then click [ OK ].

D

In the [ Print Queue Name ] box, enter the name of the print queue.

E

In the [ Print Queue Volume ] box, click [ Browse ].

F

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and then click [ OK ].

G

Check the settings, and then click [ Create ].

H

Select the object in which the printer is located, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

I

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Printer ], and then click [ OK ]. For Net-

Ware 5, click [ Printer (Non NDPS) ].

J

In the [ Printer name ] box, enter the printer name

K

Select the [ Define additional properties ] check box, and then click [ Create ].

L

Click [ Assignments ], and then click [ Add ] in the [ Assignments ] area.

M

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the queue you, and then click [ OK ].

N

Click [ Configuration ], click [ Parallel ] in the [ Printer type ] list, and then click

[ Communication ].

O

Click [ Manual load ] in the [ Communication type ] area, and then click [ OK ].

P

Check the settings, and then click [ OK ].

Q

Select a context specified using NIB Setup Tool, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

R

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Print Server ], and then click [ OK ]. For

NetWare 5, click [ Print Sever (Non NDPS) ].

239

Using a Printer Server

S

In the [ Print Server Name ] box, enter the print server name.

Use the same print server name specified using NIB Setup Tool.

T

Select the [ Define additional properties ] check box, and then click [ Create ].

U

Click [ Assignments ], and then click [ Add ] in the [ Assignments ] area.

V

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the queue you created, and then click

[ OK ].

W

Check the settings, and then click [ OK ].

X

Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the

NetWare server.

If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.

To exit

CAREE: unload pserver

To start

CAREE: load pserver “print_server_name”

Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x)

Follow the procedure below to use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare

3.x.

Setting up using NIB Setup Tool

A

Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.

B

Start NIB Setup Tool from [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Property Sheet ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Select a printer you want to configure.

E

On the [ NetWare ] tab, enter the name of the print server in the [ Print Server

Name ] box.

F

In the [ File Server Name ] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print server is created.

You can also click [ Browse ] to browse through available file servers.

G

In the [ Print Server Operation Mode ] area, click [ As Remote Printer ].

H

In the [ Remote Printer No.

] box, enter the printer number.

240

Using a Printer Server

Use the same printer number created in the print server.

I

A confirmation message appears. Click [ OK ].

J

On the [ NIB ] menu, click [ Exit ].

Setting up using PCONSOLE

A

Enter “PCONSOLE” from the command prompt.

F:> PCONSOLE

B

Create a print queue.

When using the existing print queue, go to the procedure for creating a printer.

C

From the [ Available Options ] menu, select [ Print Queue Information ], and then press the { Enter } key.

D

Press { Insert } key, and then enter a print queue name.

E

Press { ESC } key to return to the [ Available Options ] menu.

F

Set up the network connection to a printer.

G

On the [ Available Options ] menu, click [ Print Server Information ], and then press the { ENTER } key.

H

To create a new print server, press the { INSERT } key, and then enter a print server name.

For a currently defined print server, select a print server in the [ Print Server ] list.

Use the same printer name specified using NIB Setup Tool.

I

From the [ Print Server Information ] menu, select [ Print Server Configuration ].

J

From the [ Print Server Configuration ] menu, select [ Printer Configuration ].

K

Select the printer indicated as [ Not Installed ].

Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using

NIB Setup Tool.

L

To change the printer name, enter a new name.

A name “Printer x” is assigned to the printer. The “x” stands for the number of the selected printer.

M

As type, select [ Remote Parallel, LPT1 ].

The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured.

N

Press the { ESC } key, and then click [ Yes ] on the confirmation message.

241

Using a Printer Server

O

Press the { ESC } key to return to [ Print Server Configuration Menu ].

P

Assign print queues to the created printer.

Q

From [ Print Server Configuration Menu ], select [ Queues Serviced By Printer ].

R

Select the printer created.

S

Press the { INSERT } key to select a queue serviced by the printer.

You can select several queues.

T

Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.

Following these steps, check that the queues are assigned.

U

Press the { ESC } key until "Exit?" appears, and then select [ Yes ] to exit

PCONSOLE.

V

Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the

NetWare server.

If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.

To quit

CAREE: unload pserver

To start

CAREE: load pserver “print_server_name”

❒ If the printer works as configured, the message "Waiting for job" appears.

Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5)

Follow the procedure below to use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare

4.x, 5/5.1 and 6.

To use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare 4.x/5/5.1, set it to NDS mode.

❒ Do not use the printer as a remote printer when Pure IP is used.

Setting up using NIB Setup Tool

A

Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator equivalent.

B

Start NIB Setup Tool from [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Property Sheet ], and then click [ OK ].

242

Using a Printer Server

D

Select a printer you want to configure.

E

Click [ NetWare ].

F

In the [ Logon Mode ] area, click [ File Server Mode ] or [ NDS Mode ].

If [ File Server Mode ] is selected, the network connection is established based on the string you entered.

If [ NDS Mode ] is selected, the network connection is established based on the string you entered.

G

In the [ Print Server Name(P): ] box, enter the name of the print server.

Use the same print server name in NWadmin. Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters.

H

In the [ File Server Name(F): ] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print server is created.

You can also click [ Browse...

] to browse through available file servers. Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters.

I

In the [ NDS Tree(T): ] box, enter the NDS tree name and create the file server.

You can also click [ Browse...

] to browse through available NDS trees and NDS contexts. Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Hyphens and underscores can also be used.

J

In the [ NDS Context(C): ] box, enter a context in which the print server is created.

Enter up to 127 alphanumeric characters.

For context, object names from Root are entered from the lowest object, with each object separated by a period. For example, to create a print server in the

NETWORK object under the organization object DS of Root, enter “NET-

WORK.DS".

K

In the [ Print Server Option Mode ] area, click [ As Remote Printer(R) ].

L

In the [ Remote Printer No.(N) ] box, enter the printer number. Use the same printer number created.

M

Click [ OK ] to close NIB Setup Tool.

Setting up using NWadmin

A

From Windows, start NWadmin.

For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.

243

Using a Printer Server

B

Set up the network connection to a print queue. Select the object in which the print queue is located in the directory tree, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

C

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Print Queue ], and then click [ OK ].

D

In the [ Print Queue Name ] box, enter the name of the print queue.

E

In the [ Print Queue Volume ] box, click [ Browse ].

F

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and then click [ OK ].

G

Check the settings, and then click [ Create ].

H

Set up the network connection to a printer. Select the object in which the printer is located, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

I

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Printer ], and then click [ OK ]. For Net-

Ware 5, click [ Printer (Non NDPS) ].

J

In the [ Printer name ] box, enter the printer name

K

Select the [ Define additional properties ] check box, and then click [ Create ].

L

Assign print queues to the created printer. Click [ Assignments ], and then click [ Add ] in the [ Assignments ] area.

M

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the queue you created, and then click

[ OK ].

N

Click [ Configuration ], click [ Parallel ] in the [ Printer type ] list, and then click

[ Communication ].

O

Click [ Manual load ] in the [ Communication type ] area, and then click [ OK ].

Check the settings, and then click [ OK ].

P

Set up the network connection to a print server. Select a context specified using NIB Setup Tool, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

Q

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Print Server ], and then click [ OK ]. For

NetWare 5, click [ Print Sever (Non NDPS) ].

R

In the [ Print Server Name ] box, enter the print server name.

Use the same print server name specified using NIB Setup Tool.

S

Select the [ Define additional properties ] check box, and then click [ Create ].

T

Assign the printer to the created print server. Click [ Assignments ], and then click [ Add ] in the [ Assignments ] area.

244

Using a Printer Server

U

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the queue you created, and then click

[ OK ].

V

In the [ Printers ] area, click the printer you assigned, and then click [ Printer

Number ]

W

Enter the printer number, and then click [ OK ]. Check the settings, and then click [ OK ].

Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using

NIB Setup Tool.

X

Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the

NetWare server.

If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.

To exit

CAREE: unload pserver

To start

CAREE: load pserver “print_server_name”

245

Special Operations under Windows

Printing Files Directly from Windows

You can print files directly using Windows commands. For example, you can print PostScript files for PostScript 3.

Windows 95/98/Me

You can print files directly using “ftp” command.

Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0

You can print files directly using “lpr”, “rcp” or “ftp” command.

Setup

Follow the procedure below to make network environment settings.

A

Enable TCP/IP with the control panel, and then set up the printer’s network environment about TCP/IP including IP addresses.

TCP/IP of the printer is set as default.

B

Install a TCP/IP in Windows to set up the network environment.

Consult the network administrator for the local setting information.

C

To print under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT

4.0, install “Printing service for UNIX” as the network application. To print under Windows NT 4.0, install “Microsoft TCP/IP printing” as the network application.

For details about setting up IP address, see Setup Guide .

For details about setting the IP address of the printer using DHCP, see p.282 “Using DHCP” .

This completes the setup for specifying a printer using an IP address when printing. When using a host name to specify a printer, proceed to p.246

“Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address” and continue the setup.

Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address

When a host name is defined, you can specify a printer by host name instead of

IP address. The host names vary depending on the network environment.

When using DNS

Use the host name set to the data file on the DNS server.

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

246

Special Operations under Windows

When setting the IP address of a printer using DHCP

Use the printer name on the configuration page as the host name.

For details about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page” .

In other cases

Add the IP address and host name of the network printer to the hosts file on the computer used for printing. Methods of addition vary depending on operating systems.

Windows 95/98/Me

A

Copy WINDOWSHOSTS.SAM to the same directory and name it

“HOSTS” with no extension.

B

Open the "WINDOWSHOSTS" file created using memo pad files, for instance.

C

Add an IP address and host name to the hosts file using the following format:

192.168.15.16 host # NP

"192.168.15.16" is the IP address, "host" is the printer's host name, and "#NP" is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between "192.168.15.16" and

"host", between "host" and "#NP" respectively, using one line for this format.

D

Save the file.

Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0

A

Open the hosts file using memo pad files, for instance.

The hosts file is in the following folder:

WINNTSYSTEM32DRIVERSETCHOSTS

"WINNT" is the directory of the installation destination for Windows 2000/XP,

Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.

B

Add an IP address and host name to the hosts file using the following format:

192.168.15.16 host # NP

"192.168.15.16" is the IP address, "host" is the printer's host name, and "#NP" is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between "192.168.15.16" and

"host", between "host" and "#NP" respectively, using one line for this format.

247

Special Operations under Windows

C

Save the file.

Printing Commands

The following explains printing operations using the “lpr”, “rcp”, and “ftp” commands.

Enter commands using the command prompt window. The location of the command prompts varies depending on operating systems:

• Windows 95/98

[ Start ] - [ Programs ] - [ MS-DOS Prompt ]

• Windows Me

[ Start ] - [ Programs ] - [ Accessories ] - [ MS-DOS Prompt ]

• Windows 2000

[ Start ] - [ Programs ] - [ Accessories ] - [ Command Prompt ]

• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003

[ Start ] - [ All Programs ] - [ Accessories ] - [ Command Prompt ]

• Windows NT 4.0

[ Start ] - [ Programs ] - [ Command Prompt ]

❒ Match the data format of the file to be printed with the emulation mode of the printer.

❒ If the message "print requests full" appears, no print jobs can be accepted. Try again when sessions end. For each command, the amount of possible sessions is indicated as follows:

• lpr: 5(When the spool printing function is available: 10)

• rcp, rsh: 5

• ftp: 3

Enter the file name in a format including the path from the directory executing commands.

lpr

The “option” specified in a command is an intrinsic printer option and its syntax is similar to printing from UNIX. For details, see UNIX Supplement.

When specifying a printer by IP address

c:> lpr -Sprinter's IP address [-Poption] [-ol] \pass name\file name

248

Special Operations under Windows

When using a host name instead of an IP address

c:> lpr -Sprinter's host name [-Poption] [-ol] \pass name\file name

When printing a binary file, add the "-ol" option (lowercase O, and lowercase

L).

When using a printer with the host name "host" to print a PostScript file named

"file 1" located in the "C:\PRINT" directory, the command line is as follows: c:> lpr -Shost -Pfiletype=RPS -ol C:\PRINT\file1

rcp

First, register the printer's host name in the hosts file.

c:> rcp [-b] \pass name\file name [pass name\file name...] printer's host name:[option]

❒ In file names, "*" and "?" can be used as wild cards.

❒ When printing a binary file, add the “-b” option.

When using a printer with the host name "host" to print a PostScript file named

"file 1" or "file 2" located in the "C:\PRINT" directory, the command line is as follows: c:> rcp -b C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2 host:filetype=RPS

For details about registering the printer's host name in the hosts file, see p.246 “Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address” .

ftp

Use the "put" or "mput" command according to the number of files to be printed.

When one file is printed

ftp> put \pass name\file name [option]

When multiple files are printed

ftp> mput \pass name\file name [\pass name\file name...]

[option]

Follow the procedure below to print using the "ftp" command.

A

Formulate the printer's IP address or the host name of the hosts file printer as an argument and use the "ftp" command.

% ftp printer's IP address

B

Enter the user name and password, and then press the { # Enter } key.

User:

Password:

249

Special Operations under Windows

To use the default account, enter “admin” as user name, and leave the password blank.

C

When printing a binary file, set the file mode to binary.

ftp> bin

When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.

D

Specify files to be printed.

The following shows the examples of printing a PostScript file named "file 1" in the "C:\PRINT" directory and printing file 1 and file 2.

ftp> put C:\PRINT\file1 filetype=RPS ftp> mput C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2

E

Quit ftp.

ftp> bye

❒ “=”, “,”, “_”, and “;”cannot be used for filenames. File names will be read as option strings.

❒ For “mput” command, option can not be defined.

For “mput” command, “*” and “?” can be used as wild cards in file names.

When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.

250

Mac OS Configuration

Mac OS

This section explains how to configure a Mac OS to use EtherTalk and USB.

The following explains how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are not using Mac

OS 9.1, see the manual of the Mac OS you are using for details

For Mac OS 8.6 and higher. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)

The PostScript 3 printer driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-

ROM.

Mac OS 8 and 9:PS Driver:(language):Disk1

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File

It is necessary to install a printer driver and PPD files to print from a Mac OS.

Follow the procedure below to install a printer driver and a PPD file into a Mac

OS using Mac OS 8.6 and higher.

PostScript 3 Printer Driver

A

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

B

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

C

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

D

Double-click the [ PS Driver ] folder.

E

Double-click the folder of the language you use.

F

Open [ DISK1 ], and then double-click the installer icon.

G

Follow the instructions on the screen.

PPD Files

A

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

B

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

C

Double-click the [ Printer Descriptions ] folder.

D

Double-click the folder of the language you use.

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

251

Mac OS Configuration

E

Open the [ DISK1 ] folder.

F

Drag the PPD file and the plugin file into [ Printer Descriptions ] in [ Extensions ] under [ System Folder ].

G

Restart the Mac OS.

Setting Up PPD Files

❒ Make sure that the printers are connected to an AppleTalk network before performing the following procedure.

A

On the [ Apple ] menu, click [ Chooser ].

B

Click the Adobe PS icon.

C

In the [ Select a PostScript Printer: ] list, click the name of the printer you want to use.

D

Click [ Create ].

E

Click the printer you want to use, and then click [ Select ].

A PPD file is set up and the Adobe PS icon appears at the left of the printer name in the list. Follow the procedure on p.253 “Setting Up Options” to make option settings; otherwise close the [ Chooser ] dialog box.

Creating a Desktop Printer Icon

❒ Make sure that printers are connected to the USB before performing the following procedure.

To use a printer connected by USB, create a desktop printer icon.

A

Double-click [ Desktop Printer Utility ] in the [ AdobePS Components ] folder.

B

Click [ AdobePS ] in [ With: ], click [ Printer (USB) ] in [ Create Desktop ], and then click [ OK ].

C

Click [ Change ] in [ USB Printer Selection ].

D

Select the model you are using in [ Select a USB Printer: ], and then click [ OK ].

E

Click [ Auto Setup ] in [ PostScript

TM

Printer Description (PPD) File ].

F

Click [ Create ].

G

Enter the printer name, and then click [ Save ].

252

Mac OS Configuration

The printer icon appears on the desktop.

H

Quit Desktop Printer Utility.

Setting Up Options

A

On the [ Apple ] menu, click [ Chooser ].

B

Click the Adobe PS icon.

C

In the [ Select the PostScript Printer: ] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and then click [ Setup ].

D

Click [ Configure ].

A list of options appears.

E

Select the option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting for it.

F

Click [ OK ].

The list of options closes.

G

Click [ OK ].

The [ Chooser ] dialog box appears.

H

Close the [ Chooser ] dialog box.

❒ If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.

Installing the ColorSync Profiles

ColorSync profiles enable a printer to print colors consistent with those on the computer display. You must install the ColorSync profile to use this function.

Follow the procedure below to install the ColorSync profiles.

A

Start a Mac OS.

B

Double-click the hard disk icon, and then open the appropriate folder for installing the ColorSync profiles.

The location of the appropriate folder may vary depending on the version of the Mac OS. The following are examples:

• System: Preferences: ColorSync profiles

• System: ColorSync profiles

253

Mac OS Configuration

C

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM drive icon appears.

D

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.

E

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

F

Double-click the [ ColorSync

TM

Profiles ] folder.

G

Drag the file to the [ ColorSync TM Profiles ] folder on the hard disk.

The ColorSync profiles are installed.

❒ The ColorSync profiles are consistent with color characteristics defined by the International Color Consortium (ICC).

❒ For some computer displays, particular settings need to be created by

ColorSync. For details, see the appropriate manuals for your computer display.

Installing Adobe Type Manager

❒ Quit all applications currently running before installation. Install ATM after you restart the computer.

A

Start a Mac OS.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

C

Double-click the CD-ROM drive con.

D

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

E

Double-click the [ ATM ] folder.

F

Double-click the ATM 4.6.3 installer icon.

G

Follow the instructions on the screen.

H

When the procedure is complete, restart the computer. ATM will be completely installed only after restarting.

I

On the [ Apple ] menu, open [ Control Panel ], and then click [ ~ATM ].

J

The ATM control panel opens.

254

Mac OS Configuration

For details about installation, see the operating instructions in the ATM folder.

Installing Screen fonts

Follow the procedure below to install screen fonts.

The screen fonts described below can be found in the [ Fonts ] folder on the CD-

ROM.

A

Start a Mac OS.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM drive icon appears.

C

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.

D

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

E

Double-click the [ Fonts ] folder.

F

Double-click the [ Screen font ] folder.

G

Double-click the [ TrueType ] or [ Type1 ] folder.

Select the font type you want to use.

H

Copy the fonts you want to install in [ Fonts ] under [ System Folder ].

A confirmation message appears.

I

Click [ OK ].

The fonts are installed.

J

Restart the Mac OS.

Using USB Interface

Follow the procedure below to setup USB connection.

A

Open the [ AdobePS Component ] folder on the hard disk.

B

Double-click [ Desktop Printer Utility ].

C

Click [ AdobePS ] in [ With: ], click [ Printer (USB) ] in [ Create Desktop ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ Change ] in [ PostScript TM Printer Description (PPD) File ].

255

Mac OS Configuration

E

Select the PPD files of the connected printer, and then click [ Select ].

F

Click [ Change ] in [ USB Printer Selection ].

G

Select the model you are using in [ Select a USB Printer: ], and then click [ OK ].

H

Click [ Create ].

The following message appears.

I

Specify the file location and the name, and then click [ Save ].

J

Specify the file location and the name, and then click [ Save ].

The printer icon appears on the desktop.

K

Quit Desktop Printer Utility.

❒ The procedures used to configure Mac OS may vary depending on the Mac

OS version. The following describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are using a different version of Mac OS, use the following procedures as a reference and see the manuals for your Mac OS version.

❒ Mac OS supports only the standard USB ports for this printer.

When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on this printer to change printer language to [ Auto Detect ] or [ PS ] before printing.

Changing to EtherTalk

Follow the procedure below to configure to a Mac OS to use EtherTalk.

A

Open [ Control Panel ], and then double-click the AppleTalk icon.

B

On the [ Connect via: ] pop-up menu, click [ Ethernet ].

C

If you change zones, select a name on the [ Current zone: ] pop-up menu.

D

Close the AppleTalk control panel.

E

Restart the computer.

❒ The procedures used to configure Mac OS may vary depending on the Mac

OS version. The following describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are using a different version of Mac OS, use the following procedures as a reference and see the manuals for your Mac OS version.

❒ Confirm the Connection to the Printer with TCP/IP

256

Mac OS Configuration

For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see the

Mac OS manuals.

257

Mac OS Configuration

Mac OS X

This section explains how to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk and USB.

Follow the procedure below to configure Mac OS X 10.1. If you are not using Mac

OS X 10.1, see the manual of the Mac OS X you are using for details.

For Mac OS X 10.1 or higher.

The PPD files are stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.

Mac OS X:PPD Installer

Installing the PPD Files

Follow the procedure below to install a PPD file to print from Mac OS X.

You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network administrator.

A

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

B

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

C

Double-click the [ Mac OS X ] folder.

D

Double-click the installer icon.

E

Follow the instructions on the screen.

Setting Up the PPD File

A

Start Print Center.

B

Click [ Add Printer ].

Click [ AppleTalk ] on the first pop-up menu.

If the zone is set, select the zone from the second pop-up menu.

C

Select the PPD file for the model you are using from the [ Printer Model: ] pop-up menu, and then click [ Add ].

258

Mac OS Configuration

Setting Up Options

❒ No printer option settings can be made under Mac OS X. No new settings for options not installed can be made.

Using USB Interface

Follow the procedure below to setup USB connection.

A

Start Print Center.

B

Click [ Add ].

C

Click [ USB ] on the pop-up menu.

The connected printer appears.

D

Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [ Printer Model: ] pop-up menu.

A list of printer types appears.

E

Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer models, and then click [ Add ].

F

Close the [ Printer List ] dialog box, and then quit Print Center.

❒ When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on this printer to change printer language to [ Auto Detect ] or [ PS ] before printing.

USB2.0 can be used only with Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher.

Using Rendezvous

Follow the procedure below to print using Rendezvous under Mac OS X 10.2.3

or higher. Ethernet and wireless LAN connections can also be used.

A

Start Print Center.

B

Click [ Add ].

C

Click [ Rendezvous ] on the pop-up menu.

The connected printer appears.

D

Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [ Printer Model: ] pop-up menu.

259

Mac OS Configuration

A list of printer types appears.

E

Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer models, and then click [ Add ].

F

Close the [ Printer List ] dialog box, and then quit Print Center.

When printing with a Rendezvous connection to a Macintosh computer, printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on this printer to change printer language to [ Auto Detect ] or [ PS ] before printing.

Changing to EtherTalk

❒ You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network administrator

Follow the procedure below to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk.

For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see the

Mac OS manuals.

A

Open [ System Preference ], and then click the Network icon.

B

Click the [ AppleTalk ] tab.

C

Select the [ Make AppleTalk Active ] check box.

D

To change AppleTalk zones, select a name from the [ AppleTalk Zone: ] popup menu.

E

When the settings are made, click [ Apple Now ].

260

Mac OS Configuration

Configuring the Printer

Use the control panel to enable AppleTalk. (The default is active.)

261

Mac OS Configuration

Using PostScript 3

Job Type

You can select the type of print job.

❒ If you use Mac OS X, this function is not available.

Normal

Select this for normal printing. The print job starts immediately after the print command is given.

Sample Print

Use this function to print the first set of a multiple-set print job. After checking the results, the remaining sets can be printed using the control panel. This function can protect you from printing a large quantity of misprints.

Locked Print

Use this function to print confidential documents. Documents will not be printed automatically unless a password is entered using the control panel.

Using Sample Print

❒ To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.

❒ The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents of the print images. At most, the printer can save 30 jobs or 1000 pages for

Sample Print and Locked Print.

❒ If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.

❒ Sample Print files will not appear on the panel display if they have already been executed or deleted using the Web browser before you select "Sample

Print" from the control panel.

❒ Sample Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you select

[ Sample Print ] using the control panel will appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those Sample Print files.

If you use Mac OS X, Sample Print function cannot be used.

If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, sample print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.

A

In an application, select the menu command to print.

262

Mac OS Configuration

The print dialog box appears.

B

On the pop-up menu, click [ Job Log ].

C

In [ Job Type: ], click [ Sample Print ], and then select the appropriate setting.

D

In [ User ID: ], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-

9) characters.

Set this to identify the user associated with the job.

The user ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.

E

After making the necessary settings you want, click [ Print ].

The Sample Print job is sent to the printer and one set is printed.

F

Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct.

If the settings are correct, print the remaining sets.

If not, you can delete the saved job.

For details about printing the remaining sets, see p.106 “Printing the Remaining Sets” .

For details about deleting a Sample Print file, see p.107 “Deleting a Sample

Print File” .

Using Locked Print

❒ To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.

The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents of the print images. At most, the printer can save 30 jobs or 1000 pages for

Sample Print and Locked Print.

❒ If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.

❒ Locked Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor before you select [ Locked

Print ] using the control panel.

❒ Locked Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have selected [ Locked Print ] using the control panel will still appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those

Locked Print files.

If you use Mac OS X, Locked Print function cannot be used.

If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, locked print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.

263

Mac OS Configuration

❒ Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases. You can check the error log for jobs not saved.

• When there are 30 Sample Print and Locked Print jobs saved on the hard disk.

• When the total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 1000 pages.

A

In an application, select the menu command to print.

The print dialog box appears.

B

On the pop-up menu, click [ Job Log ].

C

In [ Job Type: ], click [ Locked Print ], and then select the appropriate setting.

D

In [ User ID: ], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-

9) characters, and then enter a 4-digit password in [ Password: ].

Set this to identify the user associated with the job.

E

After making the necessary settings you want, click [ Print ].

The Locked Print job is sent to the printer.

F

Enter the password using the control panel, and then specify whether to print or delete the job.

For details about entering the password, see p.110 “Entering a Password” .

For details about deleting the job, see p.111 “Deleting a Locked Print File” .

Duplex Printing

Use this function to select duplex printing.

❒ To use this function, the optional duplex unit must be installed on the printer.

❒ You cannot perform duplex printing when using the bypass tray.

None

Disables duplex printing.

Flip on Long Edge

Prints so you can open it to the long edge when bound along the long edge.

Flip on Short Edge

Prints so you can open it to the short edge when bound along the short edge.

264

Mac OS Configuration

Availability of these items varies depending on the operating system you are using. Click the button that means [ Flip on Long Edge ] or [ Flip on Short Edge ] .

Color Mode

Use this function to select whether the document is printed in color or black and white.

Color

Prints color documents in full color.

Color images are printed using CMYK toner, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and

Black. CMYK represents the three primary subtractive colors.

❒ If you want to adjust the print color, use the settings in the Advanced dialog box accessed from the Advanced button on the [ Print Quality ] tab.

Black and White

Prints everything, including color documents, in black and white. Black and

White printing is faster than Color. To stop black and white areas being printed with CMYK toner, select [ Black and White ] in the printer driver as well as in the application.

Gradation

Use this function to select a type of gradation suited to your requirements.

Fast

Prints quickly but loses smoothness.

Standard

Prints with good gradation.

Color Profile

Use this function to select the color profile pattern.

Auto

Use this setting to automatically configure the best color profile pattern based on the appearance of the document to be printed.

Photographic

Use this setting to enhance reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones.

265

Mac OS Configuration

Presentation

Use this setting to enhance reproduction of documents containing text and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color and gradation might not reproduce so well.

Solid Color

Use this setting to print specific single colors, logos and so on.

User Setting

Use this setting to print images using a CRD downloaded from your application.

CLP Simulation

Prints the output colors similar to the colors displayed on the computer screen.

❒ Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [ Fine ] or [ Super Fine ] is selected for “Color Setting”. The following items are available:

[ Auto ] , [ Photographic ] , [ Presentation ] , and [ Solid Color ] .

Color Setting

Use this function to select the correction method used for color conversion.

❒ The color rendering dictionary selected in the Color Profile setting is used.

Off

No modification to the color setting.

Fine

Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and to perform CMYK conversion. This setting performs printing at an output target of Monitor

γ

= 1.8.

Super Fine

Select this setting to use a color rendering dictionary similar to the Fine setting but is capable of producing output that is more vivid. Use this setting to emphasize lighter colors. This setting performs printing at an output target of

Monitor γ = 2.2.

266

Mac OS Configuration

Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [ Fine ] or [ Super Fine ] is selected for “Color Setting”. The following items are available:

[ Auto ] , [ Photographic ] , [ Presentation ] , and [ Solid Color ] .

CMYK Simulation Profile

You can simulate the color tone of the printing ink.

You can select the printing ink standard from US OffsetPrint, Euroscale, Japan-

Color and PaletteColor.

Dithering

Use this function to set the Image Rendering mode.

Photographic

Performs dithering in an appropriate form for photographs.

Text

Performs dithering in an appropriate form for text.

Gray Reproduction

Use this function to select Black Color mode for text and line art.

Black by K

Select this setting to use a black toner.

Black/Gray by K

Black portions are printed in gray.

CMY+K

Select this setting to use all toners.

Color Matching

Use this function to select whether or not you want the colors in the documents to be adjusted before printing, so that the printed page matches the colors on the screen closer.

Image Color Control

Open the [ Image Color Matching ] dialog box, and then click this button to specify exactly how you want the colors on your screen adjusted before printing.

267

Mac OS Configuration

Printer Utility for Mac

By using Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the name of the printer and so on.

❒ If a Macintosh and printer are connected by USB, you cannot use Printer Utility for Mac.

❒ Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and

Utilities”.

❒ Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 7.6.1-9.x, or Mac OS X 10.1.x or

10.2.1. Mac OS X 10.0.x and 10.2 are not supported.

Installing Printer Utility for Mac

Follow these steps to install Printer Utility for Mac on the machine.

A

Start the Macintosh.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM icon appears.

C

Double-click the hard disk icon to open it.

D

Double-click the CD-ROM icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.

E

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

❒ Under Mac OS X, double-click the [ Mac OS X ] folder.

F

Double-click the [ PS Utility ] folder on the CD-ROM.

G

Double-click the [ Printer Utility for Mac ] folder.

H

Double-click the folder of the language you use.

I

Move the “Printer Utility for Mac” file to the Macintosh hard disk using a drag-and-drop operation.

J

Drag the CD-ROM icon to the Trash to eject the CD-ROM.

Printer Utility for Mac is installed.

268

Mac OS Configuration

Starting Printer Utility for Mac

Mac OS

Before starting Printer Utility for Mac, make sure the printer is selected in

[ Chooser ] on the Apple menu.

A

Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.

The [ Printer Utility for Mac ] dialog box appears.

B

Click [ OK ].

Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.

Mac OS X

A

Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.

The [ Printer Utility for Mac ] dialog box appears.

B

Click [ OK ].

C

In the [ Available Printers: ] box, select the printer you want to use.

If you change zones, select a name from [ Available Network Zones: ] .

❒ Click [ Choose Printer...

] on the Printer Utility for Mac menu if you want to change the printer.

D

Select the printer you want to use.

Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.

E

Click [ Choose ].

Printer Utility for Mac Functions

Downloading PS Fonts

You can download the PS fonts to the printer memory or hard disk drive.

❒ The following procedure to download the fonts assume that you are a system administrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your system administrator.

During the download, do not turn off the power switch, operate the panel or open or close the cover.

If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to the defaults.

269

Mac OS Configuration

❒ Confirm that a Macintosh and the printer are connected with Appletalk.

A

Select [ Download PS Fonts...

] on the [ File ] menu.

B

Click [ Add to list ].

The dialog box to select fonts appears.

C

Select the desired font files, and then click [ Open ].

The list of selectable font names appears.

D

After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [ OK ].

The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears.

E

Click [ Download ].

The fonts begin to download, and the download status is shown.

F

When the completion message appears, click [ OK ].

G

Click [ Cancel ].

Some fonts cannot be downloaded.

Before downloading, read the documentation about the fonts you want to use.

Displaying Printer Fonts

You can display the available fonts currently downloaded to the printer. Fonts in the printer memory and hard disk drive can be displayed.

A

Select [ Display Printer's Fonts...

] on the [ File ] menu.

A dialog box appears.

B

Select [ Printer's memory ] or [ Printer's disk ].

C

Click [ OK ].

The fonts displayed in italics are the default fonts.

Deleting Fonts

You can delete fonts from the printer memory or hard disk drive.

You cannot delete the fonts displayed in italic.

A

Select [ Display Printer's fonts ] on the [ File ] menu.

A dialog box appears.

270

Mac OS Configuration

B

Select [ Printer's memory ] or [ Printer's disk ].

C

Select the fonts you want to delete.

D

Click [ Delete ].

A confirmation message appears.

E

Confirm the fonts you want to delete and the printer name from which you want to delete the fonts.

F

Click [ Continue ], and then click [ OK ].

G

Click [ OK ].

Initializing the Printer Disk

When initializing the printer hard disk, all the fonts downloaded to the printer hard disk drive are deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the fonts on the hard disk drive.

When initializing the printer hard disk drive from the control panel, all of the data on the printer hard disk drive is deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the data on the hard disk drive.

❒ Do not turn off the power switch until initializing is completed, otherwise the hard disk drive might be damaged.

A

Select [ Initialize Printer's Disk...

] on the [ File ] menu.

The confirmation message appears. To cancel initialization, click [ Cancel ] .

B

Click [ Execute ].

Initializing starts.

C

When the completion message appears, click [ OK ].

Page Setup

You can set the paper size on which to print “Print Fonts Catalogue” and “Prints

Fonts Sample”.

A

Select [ Page Setup...

] on the [ File ] menu.

B

Select the paper size.

Printing Font Catalog

You can print the names of fonts available on the printer.

A

Select [ Print Fonts Catalogue ] on the [ File ] menu.

271

Mac OS Configuration

B

Click [ Print ].

❒ The paper selected under [ Page Setup ] is used.

Printing Font Sample

You can print samples of fonts downloaded to the hard disk drive or memory.

A

Select [ Print Fonts Sample...

] on the [ File ] menu.

B

Click [ Print ].

❒ Print by using the paper selected on [ Page Setup ] .

Renaming the Printer

You can change the printer name displayed under Appletalk. If you connect several printers on the network, assign different names so you can identify them. If several printers have the same name, a digit appears next to the printer name in

[ Chooser ] .

❒ You can enter up to 31 digits and letters.

Do not use symbols, for example “*”, “:”, “=”, “@”, “~”.

Mac OS

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Rename Printer...

].

B

In the [ New Name: ] filed enter a new name.

C

Click [ Rename ].

The printer name is changed.

D

Click [ OK ].

E

On the Apple menu, click [ Chooser ].

F

Click the [ AdobePS ] icon.

G

Select the printer whose name you changed, and then close the [ Chooser ] dialog box.

❒ If there are several Appletalk zones, select the zone the machine belongs to.

272

Mac OS Configuration

Mac OS X

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Rename Printer...

].

B

In the [ New Name: ] filed enter a new name.

C

Click [ Rename ].

The printer name is changed.

D

Click [ OK ].

E

On the [ Printer Utility for Mac ] menu, click [ Choose Printer...

].

F

In the [ Available Network Zones: ] list, select the zone for the Macintosh in use.

G

In the [ Available Printers: ] list, select the printer whose name you changed, and then click [ Choose ].

Restarting the Printer

You can restart the printer.

A

Select [ Restart Printer ] on the [ File ] menu.

B

Confirm the message that appears on the screen, and then click [ Restart ].

The printer restarts.

❒ The fonts downloaded in the printer memory will be deleted.

❒ If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to the defaults.

Downloading PostScript Files

You can download a Postscript file to the printer.

A

Select [ Download PostScript File...

] on the [ Utility ] menu.

B

Select the file name to download, click the file name, and then click

[ Open ].

C

Type the log file name, and then click [ Save ].

The selected file is downloaded.

❒ Errors are recorded in the log file.

Selecting the Zone

You can change the zone to which the printer belongs under Appletalk.

273

Mac OS Configuration

Confirm that a Macintosh and printer are connected with Appletalk.

Mac OS

A

On the [ Utility ] menu, click [ Select Zone...

].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.

B

Select the zone in which you want to locate the printer, and then click

[ Change ].

A confirmation message appears.

C

Click [ Continue ].

A confirmation message appears.

D

Click [ OK ].

E

On the Apple menu, click [ Chooser ].

F

Click the [ AdobePS ] icon.

G

In the [ Appletalk zone: ] list, select the zone you changed.

H

In the [ Select a PostScript Printer: ] list, select the printer you want to use.

I

Close the [ Chooser ] dialog box.

Mac OS X

A

On the [ Utility ] menu, click [ Select Zone...

].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.

B

Select the zone which you want to locate the printer in, and then click

[ Change ].

A confirmation message appears.

C

Click [ Continue ].

A confirmation message appears.

D

Click [ OK ].

E

On the [ Printer Utility for Mac ] menu, click [ Choose Printer...

].

F

In the [ Available Network Zones: ] list, select the zone you changed.

G

In the [ Available Printers: ] list, select the model of printer in use, and then click [ Choose ].

274

Mac OS Configuration

Displaying the Printer Status

You can display and confirm the current status of the printer.

A

Select [ Display Printer Status...

] on the [ Utility ] menu.

The current status of the printer appears.

B

Confirm the current status of the printer.

You can confirm the memory capacity, the VM (Virtual Memory) space, the hard disk drive status and available space on the hard disk drive. You can also confirm the zone to which the printer belongs.

C

Click [ OK ].

Launching the Dialogue Console

You can create and edit a PostScript file for printing, and then download it to the printer.

❒ “Launch Dialogue Console” is recommended for users with an understanding of PostScript.

❒ Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the printer.

“Launch Dialogue Console” must be used at your own responsibility.

A

Select [ Launch Dialogue Console...

] on the [ Utility ] menu.

Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears.

B

Type the PostScript command in the editor screen.

To edit a PostScript file, select [ Open ] on the [ File ] menu to open it.

You can search or replace a character string by using the [ Search ] menu.

C

After editing the PostScript file, select [ Download Top Window ] on [ Console ] menu to start printing.

The PostScript file is sent to the printer.

The [ Reply from Printer ] box opens, depending on the PostScript file you sent.

D

Select [ Return To Main Menu ] on the [ Console ] menu to close the PostScript file.

275

Appendix

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-

ROM

The following softwares and utilities are included in the CD-ROMs that come with the printer.

Font Manager 2000

For installing new screen fonts, or organizing and managing fonts already in the system. For details about Font Manager 2000, see the manual on the CD-

ROM labeled "Printer Drivers and Utilities".

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

For the system administrator to manage network printers.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

For users to manage their network print status.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help

1394 Utility

For the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit. For details, see the Readme file or the manual provided with the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit.

USB Printing Support

For connection to Windows 98 SE/Me computers via USB.

Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM

Follow the procedure below to view the contents of the CD-ROM.

A

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

B

Click [ Browse This CD-ROM ].

Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.

Printer Drivers for This Printer

Printing requires installing a printer driver appropriate to your operating system.

The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

G1058614_1.00

Copyright © 2004

276

Appendix

PCL 5c/6/5e printer driver

This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language.

The following operating system is supported.

• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0

For Windows NT 4.0, Service Pack 6 or higher is required.

You can only print in black and white with PCL 5e driver.

RPCS printer driver

This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. In addition to the conventional user interface, another preset user interface is provided.

The following operating system is supported.

• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0

For Windows NT 4.0, Service Pack 6 or higher is required.

PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files

PostScript printer drivers and the PPD files are included on the CD-ROM provided with this printer. PostScript printer drivers allow the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.

The following operating system is supported.

• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows

NT 4.0, Mac OS, and Mac OS X

❒ The PostScript printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.

❒ For Mac OS, version 8.6 or higher is required. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)

PPD files

PPD files are included on the CD-ROM provided with this printer. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is an application that uses TCP/IP and IPX/SPX to monitor network printers. It can monitor multiple network printers using IP address We recommend that network administrators use this application.

277

Appendix

File path

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder on the CD-

ROM.

NETWORK\NETMON\admin\DISK1

Operating system

Windows 95/98/Me

Windows 2000

Windows XP

Windows Server 2003

Windows NT 4.0

Protocol stack

TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me

NetWare Client provided with Windows 95/98

Novell Client provided with Windows 95/98

TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000

NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000

Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Window NT

TCP/IP provided with Windows XP

IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP

NetWare Client provided with Windows XP

Novell Client provided with Windows XP

TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003

IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003

NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003

Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003

TCP/IP provided with Windows NT

IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT

Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows

NT

Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT

Available functions

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the following functions to check:

• printer supplies such as paper or toner;

• results of print jobs executed from the computer.

For information about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client has the following functions. We recommend that users install this application.

278

Appendix

• Printing in a peer-to-peer network, using TCP/IP, NetBEUI, and IPP from Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.

• Constantly monitoring the status of devices on the network using TCP/IP and

IPX/SPX.

File path

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following folder on the CD-

ROM.

NETWORK\NETMON\CLIENT\DISK1

Operating system

Windows 95/98/Me

Windows 2000

Windows XP

Windows Server 2003

Windows NT 4.0

Protocol stack

TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me

NetBEUI provided with Windows 95/98/Me

NetWare Client provided with Windows 95/98/Me

Novell Client provided with Windows 95/98/Me

TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000

NetBEUI provided with Windows 2000

NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000

Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or NT

TCP/IP provided with Windows XP

IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP

NetWare Client provided with Windows XP

Novell Client provided with Windows XP

TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003

IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003

NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003

Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003

TCP/IP provided with Windows NT

IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT

NetBEUI provided with Windows NT

Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows

NT

Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT

Available functions

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client has the following functions.

• Peer-to-peer print function

• Prints directly on the network printer without sending any data to a print server.

279

Appendix

• Prints on a substitute printer when there are too many jobs waiting on the specified printer, or when an error disables printing (Recovery Printing).

• Allocates multiple print jobs to multiple printers (Parallel Printing).

• Executes prior group registration of printers specified for Recovery

Printing or Parallel Printing.

• Notification function

• Displays an error message when there is an error on the specified printer while transferring or printing data.

• Notifies a print completion. You can also be notified of the print condition, such as displaying the notice only when Recovery Printing is executed.

• Monitoring function

• Checks printer supplies such as paper or toner.

• Simultaneously monitors multiple printers in use.

• Checks the printer's network settings and detailed information of printers.

• Enables you to check the print job log using the user ID

❒ For Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing, the options on the printers must be the same. If a necessary option is not installed, a printer cannot be used for Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing.

❒ For Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing, the paper loaded in the printers must be the same. When a tray is selected for printing, load the same paper in that tray in all printers.

For Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing, the print results may be different if the printers are not the same model or have exactly the same options.

If you select Sample Print or Locked Print, you cannot select Recovery

Printing or Parallel Printing.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help

280

Appendix

Additional Information on the Printer Driver

Enable Large Papers

When you select the [ Enable Large Papers ] check box on the [ Advanced Options ] tab of the PCL printer driver properties dialog box, large paper sizes, such as 11” x

17”, A3, B4 JIS, and 8K become available in the [ Document Size ] list on the [ Paper ] tab.

Large paper size documents will be automatically reduced to fit smaller size paper and print on them. Each large paper size document is reduced to the respective smaller paper size, as follows:

• 11” x 17” documents are printed on Letter size paper.

• A3 and B4 JIS documents are printed on A4 paper.

• 8K documents are printed on 16K paper.

281

Appendix

Cautions to Take When Using in a network

Connecting a Dial-up Router to a Network

When the NetWare file server and printer are on opposite sides of a router, packets are sent back and forth, causing communication charges to be incurred. Because packet transmission is a specification of NetWare, you need to change the configuration of the router. If the network you are using does not allow you to configure the router, configure the printer instead.

Configuring the router

Filter packets so that they do not pass over the dial-up router.

❒ The MAC address of the printer doing the filtering is printed on the printer configuration page. For details about printing a configuration page, see p.130

“Printing a Configuration Page” .

For details about configuring the printer if the router cannot be configured, see the instructions below.

Configuring the printer with NetWare

A

Configure the file server.

B

Set the frame type for a NetWare environment.

For details about selecting a frame type, see p.149 “Frame Type (NW)” .

Configuring the printer without NetWare

A

When not printing, the network interface board sends packets over the network. Set NetWare to "inactive".

For details about selecting protocols, see p.149 “Active Protocol” .

Using DHCP

This printer can be used in a DHCP environment. In a WINS server environment, the printer name can simultaneously be registered with a WINS server.

Note the following points when an Ethernet interface and an IEEE 1394 (IP over

1394) interface are simultaneously installed.

282

Appendix

When static IP addresses are set for each interface

• IP address: When set at the same value, the Ethernet interface is preferred.

• Subnet mask: When a value overlaps, the Ethernet interface is preferred.

• Gateway address: The value set is used. For the gateway address, set the gateway address located in the subnetwork set by the interface. If the value is outside the subnet range set by the interface, it operates as “0.0.0.0”.

When each setting is acquired from the DHCP server

• IP address, subnet mask: Set for each value leased by the DHCP server operating on a connected interface. When overlapping IP addresses or identical IP addresses in the subnetwork are set, only the highest priority active value is set for the interface.

❒ The default priority interface is Ethernet.

• AutoNet: An automatic private address (169.254. xxx.xxx) is set for high priority interfaces.

❒ The default priority interface is IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).

• Gateway address, DNS server address, domain name: Settings are made for DHCP-acquired values that have the highest interface priority.

If the gateway address is outside the subnetwork range set by the interface, it operates as “0.0.0.0”.

❒ The default priority interface is Ethernet.

When the settings of the static IP addresses and the DHCP acquired value overlap

• IP address, subnet mask: When the static IP address and DHCP-acquired value (IP address) are the same, or the static subnet mask value and

DHCP-acquired subnet mask value overlap, the interface set by the static

IP address is available using its value set. The interface set by DHCP is reset to the default.

• Gateway address: Use the manually set value.

• If a gateway address is set outside the interface subnetwork range, it operates as “0.0.0.0".

❒ When the static IP address is not set, or is set as “0.0.0.0”, the interface setting the DHCP-acquired value is activated.

❒ Supported DHCP server operating systems are: Windows 2000 Server, Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or higher, NetWare, and UNIX standard.

283

Appendix

❒ The IP address acquired from DHCP can be checked on the configuration page. For information about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page” .

When using WINS server, set the WINS server as shown on p.284 “Configuring the WINS Server” .

Under the WINS server, host names can be used for remote network printer ports.

If you are not using the WINS server, reserve the printer's IP address in the

DHCP server so the same IP address is assigned every time.

When there are multiple DHCP servers, make the same reservation for all.

This printer uses information from the DHCP server that responds first.

❒ The DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you are using the DHCP relayagent on an ISDN line network, expensive line charges will be incurred. This is because your computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet is transferred from the printer.

Using AutoNet

If the printer IP address is not assigned by a DHCP server automatically, a temporary IP address starting with 169.254, which is not used on the network, can be automatically selected by the printer.

You must change this setting to “on” to use AutoNet.

See p.184 “autonet” .

The DHCP-assigned IP address has priority over that selected by AutoNet.

The printer reboots at this time, and is temporarily unable to print.

❒ You can check the current IP address on the configuration page. For details about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration

Page” .

❒ When AutoNet is running, the printer name is not registered on the WINS server.

❒ No communication can take place except between units started up using AutoNet. However, communication can take place with Macintosh computers running Mac OS X 10.2.3 or higher versions.

Configuring the WINS Server

The printer can be configured to register its NetBIOS name with a WINS server when the power is turned on. This enables the NetBIOS name of the printer to be specified from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin even in a DHCP environment.

This section explains configuring the WINS server.

284

Appendix

The WINS server is supported with Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or higher, and Windows 2000 Servers WINS Manager.

For details about the WINS server settings, see Windows Help.

❒ If there is no reply from the WINS server, the NetBIOS name is registered by broadcast.

❒ The NetBIOS name can be entered using up to 13 alphanumeric characters.

Using Web Image Monitor

A

Start a Web browser.

B

Enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar to access the printer whose settings you want to change.

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

C

Click [ Login ].

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

D

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

To use the default account, enter "admin" as user name, and leave the password blank.

E

In the left area, click [ Configuration ], and then click [ Network ].

F

Click [ TCP/IP ].

G

Check that [ Enable ] is selected for [ WINS ] in the [ Ethernet+IEEE 802.11b

] column, and then enter the WINS server IP address in [ Primary WINS Server ] and [ Secondary WINS Server ].

❒ When installing the optional expansion 1394 board and using IP over 1394 simultaneously, perform the same operations in the [ IP over 1394 ] column.

H

Click [ Apply ].

I

Quit Web Image Monitor.

Using telnet

See p.182 “Using telnet”

285

Appendix

Using the Dynamic DNS Function

Dynamic DNS is a function which dynamically updates (registers and deletes) records (A record and PTR record) managed by the DNS server. When a DNS server is part of the network environment to which this printer, a DNS client, is connected, records can be dynamically updated using this function.

Updating

Updating procedure varies depending on whether the printer IP address is static or acquired by DHCP.

❒ When the dynamic DNS function is not used, records managed by the DNS server must be updated manually, if the printer's IP address is changed.

❒ To update the record using the printer, the DNS server has to have one of the following:

• No security settings made.

• If security settings are made, an IP-specified client (this printer) permits updating.

For a static IP setting

If the IP address or host name is changed, the A and PTR records are updated.

If the A record is registered, CNAME is also registered. CNAMEs that can be registered are as follows:

• Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b

RNPXXXXXX (XXXXXX represents the last 3 hexadecimal bytes of the

MAC address)

• IEEE 1394

RNPXXXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXXXX represents the lower 3-7 bytes of the

MAC Address in hexadecimal)

For DHCP settings

As a substitute for the printer, the DHCP server updates the record, and one of the following occurs:

• When the printer acquires the IP address from the DHCP server, the DHCP server updates the A and PTR records.

• When the printer acquires the IP address from the DHCP server, the printer updates the A record, and the DHCP server updates the PTR record.

If the A record is registered, CNAME is also registered. CNAMEs that can be registered are as follows:

• Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b

RNPXXXXXX (XXXXXX represents the last 3 hexadecimal bytes of the

MAC address)

286

Appendix

• IEEE 1394

RNPXXXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXXXX represents the lower 3-7 bytes of the

MAC Address in hexadecimal)

Dynamic update using message authentication (TSIG, SIG(0)) is not supported.

DNS servers targeted for operation

For static IP setting

• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows

Server 2003 features

• BIND 8.2.3 or higher

For DHCP setup, when the printer updates the A record

• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows

Server 2003 features

• BIND 8.2.3 or higher

For DHCP setup, when the DHCP server updates records

• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows

Server 2003 features

• BIND 8.2.3 or higher

• DNS servers with standard NetWare 5 (or a higher version) features

DHCP servers targeted for operation

As a substitute for the printer, DHCP servers capable of updating the A record and PTR record are as follows:

• Microsoft DHCP servers with standard Windows 2000 Server (Service Pack

3 or higher versions)/Windows Server 2003 features

• ISC DHCP 3.0 or higher

• DHCP server with standard NetWare 5 features

Setting the dynamic DNS function

Make settings with telnet using the “dns” command. For details, see p.187 “dns” .

287

Appendix

Configuring SSL Encryption

This section describes how to configure SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption.

Using SSL encryption, you can issue a server certificate to authorize use of the printer.

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption

This can be specified only when the optional network date protection unit is installed.

This can be specified by the network administrator.

To protect the communication path and establish encrypted communication, create and install the server certificate.

There are two ways of installing a server certificate: create and install a self-certificate using the machine, or request a certificate from a certificate authority and install it.

Configuration flow (self-signed certificate)

A Creating and installing the server certificate

Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

B Enabling SSL

Enable the [ SSL/TLS ] setting using Web Image Monitor.

Configuration flow (certificate issued by a certificate authority)

A Creating the server certificate

Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

The application procedure after creating the certificate depends on the certificate authority. Follow the procedure specified by the certificate authority.

B Installing the server certificate

Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

C Enabling SSL

Enable the [ SSL/TLS ] setting using Web Image Monitor.

Creating and Installing the Server Certificate (Self-Signed Certificate)

Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

Creating and Installing the Self-Signed Certificate

Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

This section explains the use of a self-certificate as the server certificate.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.

288

Appendix

C

Log on to the printer.

The network administrator can log on.

Enter the login user name and login password.

D

Click [ Configuration ], then click [ Security ], and then click [ Certificates ].

E

Click [ Create ].

F

Make the necessary settings.

For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image

Monitor Help.

G

Click [ OK ].

The setting is changed.

H

Click [ OK ].

A security warning dialog box appears.

I

Check the details, and then click [ OK ].

[ Installed ] appears under [ Certificate Status ] to show that a server certificate for the printer has been installed.

J

Log off from the printer.

Click [ Delete ] to delete the server certificate from the printer.

Creating the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as the server certificate.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.

C

Log on to the printer.

The network administrator can log on.

Enter the login user name and login password.

D

Click [ Configuration ], then click [ Security ], and then click [ Certificates ].

The [ Certificates ] page appears.

E

Click [ Request ].

289

Appendix

F

Make the necessary settings.

For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image

Monitor Help.

G

Click [ OK ].

[ Requesting ] appears for [ Certificate Status ] in the [ Certificates ] area.

Quoting the character string displayed in [ Certificate Request Contents: ] , apply to the certificate authority for a certificate.

H

Log off from the printer.

I

Apply to the certificate authority for the server certificate.

The application procedure depends on the certificate authority. For details, contact the certificate authority.

When applying, use the data created with Web Image Monitor.

Using Web Image Monitor, you can create the contents of the server certificate but you cannot send the application.

❒ Click [ Cancel Request ] to cancel the request for the server certificate.

Installing the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as the server certificate.

Enter the server certificate contents issued by the certificate authority.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.

C

Log on to the printer.

The network administrator can log on.

Enter the login user name and login password.

D

Click [ Configuration ], then click [ Security ], and then click [ Certificates ].

The [ Certificates ] page appears.

E

Click [ Install ].

F

Enter the contents of the server certificate.

In the [ Certificate Request ] box, enter the contents of the server certificate received from the certificate authority.

290

Appendix

For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image

Monitor Help.

G

Click [ OK ].

[ Installed ] appears under [ Certificate Status ] to show that a server certificate for the printer has been installed.

H

Log off from the printer.

Enabling SSL

After installing the server certificate in the printer, enable the SSL setting.

This procedure is used for a self-signed certificate or a certificate issued by a certificate authority.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.

C

Log on to the printer.

The network administrator can log on.

Enter the login user name and login password.

D

Click [ Configuration ], then click [ Security ], and then click [ SSL/TLS ].

The [ SSL/TLS ] page appears.

E

Click [ Enable ] for [ SSL/TLS ].

F

Click [ Apply ].

The SSL setting is enabled.

G

Log off from the printer.

If you set [ Permit SSL / TLS Communiation ] to [ Ciphertext Only ] , enter “https://(printer's address)/” to access the printer.

User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

If you have installed a server certificate and enabled SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), you need to install the certificate on the user’s computer.

The network administrator must explain the procedure for installing the certificate to users.

If a warning dialog box appears while accessing the machine using the Web browser or IPP, start the Certificate Import Wizard and install a certificate.

291

Appendix

A

When the [ Security Alert ] dialog box appears, click [ View Certificate ].

The [ Certificate ] dialog box appears.

To be able to respond to inquiries from users about such problems as expiry of the certificate, check the contents of the certificate.

B

On the [ General ] tab, click [ Install Certificate...

].

Certificate Import Wizard starts.

C

Install the certificate by following the Certificate Import Wizard instructions.

❒ For details about how to install the certificate, see the Web browser Help.

❒ If a certificate issued by a certificate authority is installed in the printer, confirm the certificate store location with the certificate authority.

For details about where to store the certificate when accessing the printer using IPP, see the Web Image Monitor Help.

292

Appendix

Installing Font Manager 2000

❒ Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, installing applications by Auto Run requires administrator permission. To install a printer driver by Auto Run, log on using an account that has administrator permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

C

Click [ Font Manager 2000 ].

D

Follow the instructions on the screen.

293

Appendix

Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0

Under Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0

with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy PPD files to the PageMaker folder.

PPD files have the .ppd extension in the folder “DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME \(Language)\DISK1\” on the CD-ROM.

The “WIN9X_ME” folder inside the “PS” folder is for Windows 95/98/Me. Use the folder at this level that is appropriate for the operating system you are currently using.

The third folder “(Language)” may be substituted by an appropriate language name.

Copy the .ppd file to the PageMaker folder.

• For PageMaker 6.0 default installation

The directory is “C:\PM6\RSRC\PPD4”.

• For PageMaker 6.5 default installation

The directory is “C:\PM65\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.

The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.

• For PageMaker 7.0 default installation

The directory is “C:\PM7\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.

The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.

294

Appendix

When Using Windows Terminal

Service/MetaFrame

The following explains how to use Windows Terminal Service and Maintenance.

Operating Environment

The following operating systems and MetaFrame versions are supported.

Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition

• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3/SP4

• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/FR1

Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server

• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3/SP4

• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/FR1/FR2

Supported Printer Drivers

When Windows Terminal Service is operating

• PCL printer drivers

• PostScript 3

❒ The RPCS printer driver is not supported.

❒ Some RPCS printer driver functions do not work if Windows Terminal Service is installed.

Limitations

The following limitations apply to the Windows Terminal Service environment.

These limitations are built in Windows Terminal Service or MetaFrame.

Windows Terminal Service

In an environment where Windows Terminal Service is installed, some printer driver functions are unavailable, even if no Windows Terminal Service functions are used. Use the install mode to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client in an environment where Terminal Service is running on a Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition or Windows 2000 Server family computer. The following are the two methods of installation using the install mode:

295

Appendix

A Use [ Add/Remove Programs ] in [ Control Panel ] to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

B Enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt:

CHANGE USER /INSTALL

To quit the install mode, enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt:

CHANGE USER /EXECUTE

For more information, see Windows Help.

MetaFrame's

[

Auto-creating client printers

]

Using [ Auto-creating client printers ] , you can select a logical printer created by copying the client's local printer data to the MetaFrame server. We strongly recommend testing this function in your network environment before using it for your work.

• The settings for optional equipment will not be stored in the server after the equipment is disconnected. The settings for optional equipment will be restored to its defaults each time the client computer logs on to the server.

• When printing a large number of bitmap images or using the server in a

WAN environment over dial-up lines such as ISDN, printing may not be possible or errors may occur, depending on data transfer rates.

• When using MetaFrame XP 1.0 or higher versions, we recommend making settings in [ Client Printer bandwidth ] under [ Citrix Management Console ] according to the environment.

• If a print error occurs on the server and the print job or a printer created in

[ Auto-creating client printers ] cannot be deleted, we recommend the following:

• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3, MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/FR1

Make settings in [ Delete unfinished print jobs ] in the registry. For details, see the Readme file provided with MetaFrame.

• MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR2

Make settings in [ Delete pending print jobs at logout ] under [ Printer Properties Management ] of Citrix Management Console.

MetaFrame's

[

Printer driver replication

]

Using [ Printer driver replication ] , you can distribute printer drivers across all servers in a server farm. We strongly recommend testing this function in your network environment before using it for your work.

• If the printer drivers are not properly copied, install them directly onto each server.

296

Appendix

Cautions When Using Bluetooth Interface

Unit

The optional Bluetooth interface unit operation mode is set to [ public ] as default.

If the setting is changed to [ private ] , only registered computers can use this printer via the Bluetooth interface unit.

Check the operation mode settings using Web Image Monitor or telnet.

For details about using Web Image Monitor, see p.163 “Using Web Image

Monitor” . For details about setting items, see Web Image Monitor Help.

For details about making operation mode settings using telnet, see p.184 “btconfig” .

297

Appendix

Information about Installed Applications

expat

Use of the software installed on this product, including the controller (hereinafter

"software") and the expat Version 1.95.2 application software (hereinafter "expat

1.95.2"), is subject to the following conditions:

The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of the product including expat 1.95.2 and the product manufacturer allows the initial developer of expat 1.95.2 to be free from these obligations.

Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the

Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WAR-

RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-

POSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR

COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHER-

WISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFT-

WARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Information on expat 1.95.2 is available at: http://expat.sourceforge.net/

JPEG LIBRARY

• The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

NetBSD

Copyright Notice of NetBSD

For all users to use this product:

298

Appendix

This product contains NetBSD operating system:

For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright.

The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries, the source code tree must be consulted.

A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.

Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.

and its contributors.

D Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND

CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DIS-

CLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS

BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEM-

PLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF

USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AD-

VISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Authors Name List

All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.

The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software that we have mentioned in this document:

• This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

299

Appendix

• This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the Net-

BSD Project.

• This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.

and its contributors.

• This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.

• This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.

• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.

• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.

• This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.

• This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.

• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum.

• This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.

• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R.

Thorpe for the NetBSD Project.

• This product includes software developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.

• This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.

• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for the NetBSD Project.

• This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.

• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.

• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.

• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD

Project.

• This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.

• This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the

NetBSD Project.

• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank van der Linden

• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R.

Thorpe.

• The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.

• This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the University of California, Berkeley, and contributors.

Samba(Ver 2.2.2–1.1)

Copyright (C) Andrew Tridgell 1994-1998

300

Appendix

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software

Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FIT-

NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public

License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,

Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.

RSA

®

BSAFE™

• This product includes RSA ® BSAFE™ cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security Inc.

• RSA is a registered trademark and BSAFE is a registered trademark of RSA

Security Inc.in the United States and/or other countries.

• RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.

301

advertisement

Key Features

  • Print, copy, scan, and fax capabilities
  • High-quality output with a resolution of up to 1200 x 1200 dpi
  • Fast print speeds of up to 30 pages per minute (ppm)
  • Automatic duplex printing
  • Built-in network connectivity
  • Large paper capacity of up to 850 sheets
  • Easy-to-use control panel

Related manuals

Frequently Answers and Questions

How do I connect the printer to my computer?
You can connect the printer to your computer using a USB cable, a parallel cable, or an Ethernet cable.
How do I install the printer driver?
You can download the printer driver from the manufacturer's website.
How do I print a document?
To print a document, open the document in your software program, click on the "File" menu, and then click on the "Print" command.

advertisement

Table of contents